1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format default
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
79 \float_placement class
80 \float_alignment class
84 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
85 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation skip
141 \math_numbering_side default
142 \quotes_style english
146 \paperpagestyle default
148 \tracking_changes true
149 \output_changes false
153 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
154 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
155 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
167 by the \SpecialChar LyX
172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
174 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
175 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
176 Documentation mailing list:
177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
179 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Note Note
202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
203 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
217 \begin_layout Standard
218 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
219 LatexCommand tableofcontents
226 \begin_layout Chapter
230 \begin_layout Section
231 What is \SpecialChar LyX
235 \begin_layout Standard
237 is a document preparation system.
238 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
239 scripts, publishable books, business
240 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
241 It is unlike most other
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
249 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
251 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 pt type, left justified, 5
268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
281 \begin_layout Standard
282 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
287 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
291 \begin_layout Standard
296 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
297 's philosophy: most importantly,
298 the format of all of the manuals.
299 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
300 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
306 manual describes that, too.
309 \begin_layout Section
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
316 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
318 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
319 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
323 \begin_layout Standard
324 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
325 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
326 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
328 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
329 only a vertical scrollbar.
330 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
331 The first case is large images.
332 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
333 image and use the option
344 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
347 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
348 this doesn't work for equations yet.
351 \begin_layout Standard
352 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
353 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
361 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
368 \begin_layout Section
372 \begin_layout Standard
373 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
375 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
377 Just select the manual you want to read from the
384 \begin_layout Section
385 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
389 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
396 \begin_layout Standard
397 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
398 can be configured via the menu
400 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
404 \begin_inset Index idx
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
414 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
417 packages are available.
418 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
420 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
422 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
427 \begin_inset space \space{}
430 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
431 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
433 To force \SpecialChar LyX
434 to re-inspect your system, you should use
436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
440 \begin_inset Index idx
443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
444 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
450 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
451 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
454 \begin_layout Section
457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
459 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
466 \begin_layout Standard
467 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
468 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
469 installed, but you will not be
470 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
471 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
472 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
473 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
474 document can always be output as plain text
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 or DocBook classes or packages.
481 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
482 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
487 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
488 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
491 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
500 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
507 \begin_inset Index idx
510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
511 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
519 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \begin_layout Chapter
531 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
535 \begin_layout Section
536 Basic File Operations
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
549 \begin_layout Standard
554 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
555 in addition to some more advanced operations:
558 \begin_layout Itemize
580 \begin_layout Itemize
596 arg "buffer-new-template"
602 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
632 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
636 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
650 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
666 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
676 \begin_layout Itemize
698 \begin_layout Itemize
710 arg "buffer-write-as"
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
718 \begin_layout Itemize
720 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
736 \begin_layout Itemize
750 \begin_layout Itemize
764 \begin_layout Standard
765 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
766 a few minor differences.
769 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
780 command lists the available templates.
781 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
782 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
783 and possibly propose text fragments
785 for the document, features
786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
789 you would otherwise need to
790 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
800 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
808 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
814 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
815 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
819 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
827 \begin_layout Standard
828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
860 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
861 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
862 is just that — a big, blank space.
870 \begin_layout Standard
891 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
896 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
899 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
917 will reload the document from disk.
918 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
919 and want to restore it to the last save.
928 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
929 them as your changes.
932 \begin_layout Section
933 Basic Editing Features
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
946 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
953 \begin_layout Standard
954 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
955 can perform cut and paste operations
956 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
957 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
958 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
959 editing features and how to access
961 We will start with cut and paste.
964 \begin_layout Standard
965 As you might expect, the
969 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
970 various other editing features.
971 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
975 \begin_layout Itemize
981 \begin_inset Index idx
984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1019 \begin_inset Index idx
1022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset Index idx
1060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1085 \begin_layout Itemize
1089 \begin_inset space ~
1095 \begin_layout Itemize
1099 \begin_inset space ~
1105 \begin_layout Itemize
1109 \begin_inset space ~
1113 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1131 \begin_inset Index idx
1134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1149 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1159 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1165 \begin_layout Standard
1166 The first three are self-explanatory.
1167 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1168 and other programs by
1189 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1190 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1195 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1196 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1197 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1198 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1199 into individual cells.
1203 \begin_inset space ~
1208 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1209 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1213 \begin_layout Standard
1217 \begin_inset space ~
1222 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1224 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1239 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1240 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1241 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1247 \begin_inset space \space{}
1250 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1251 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1257 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1277 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1279 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1289 start a new paragraph.
1290 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1291 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1299 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1305 \begin_inset space ~
1313 \begin_inset space ~
1316 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1319 paste from the primary selection.
1320 This is normally the currently selected text.
1323 \begin_layout Standard
1326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1328 \begin_inset space ~
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_inset space ~
1344 \begin_inset space ~
1350 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1356 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1359 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 button to skip the current word.
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1386 \begin_inset space ~
1391 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1393 If the toggle is set, searching for
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1405 will not match the word
1406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1420 Match whole words only
1422 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1423 to only find complete words, e.
1424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1453 offers also an advanced
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1465 feature that is described in section
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1472 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1481 \begin_inset space \space{}
1485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1493 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1495 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1500 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1511 arg "inset-select-all"
1514 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1515 When the cursor is inside an inset
1518 arg "inset-select-all"
1521 selects the content of the inset.
1525 arg "inset-select-all"
1528 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1533 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1536 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1540 \begin_layout Section
1542 \begin_inset Index idx
1545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1552 \begin_inset Index idx
1555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1564 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1571 \begin_layout Standard
1572 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1574 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1580 or the toolbar button
1586 to undo some mistake.
1587 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1592 or the toolbar button
1599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1606 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1610 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1613 \begin_layout Standard
1614 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1623 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1624 This is a consequence of the 100
1625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1628 step undo limit mentioned above.
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1640 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1642 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1646 \begin_layout Section
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1661 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1664 \begin_layout Enumerate
1669 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 once anywhere in the edit window.
1675 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1679 \begin_layout Enumerate
1684 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1698 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1701 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_layout Enumerate
1713 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1717 \begin_layout Standard
1718 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1719 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1723 \begin_layout Section
1725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1727 name "sec:Navigating"
1732 \begin_inset Index idx
1735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1744 \begin_layout Standard
1746 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1749 \begin_layout Itemize
1754 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1755 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1758 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1761 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1768 or by the toolbar button
1771 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1777 \begin_layout Itemize
1778 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1780 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1783 and use the same menu to return to them.
1784 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1787 \begin_layout Standard
1791 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1796 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1797 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1799 \begin_inset space ~
1804 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1805 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1806 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1807 your last editing position.
1810 \begin_layout Standard
1815 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1819 \begin_layout Subsection
1821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1823 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1828 \begin_inset Index idx
1831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1832 Navigating ! Outline
1838 \begin_inset Index idx
1841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1850 \begin_layout Standard
1851 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1852 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1853 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1861 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1865 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1872 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1877 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1882 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1883 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1884 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1885 dialog and to modify the citation.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1893 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1894 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1896 Labels and References
1898 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1907 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1910 \begin_layout Standard
1911 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1912 you further to control the display.
1917 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1918 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1924 option keeps it in the current view state.
1925 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1929 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1933 3, the subsections of sections
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1942 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1947 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1957 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1960 \begin_layout Standard
1967 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1968 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1982 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1983 So, for example, you can move section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset space ~
1991 2.4 or after section
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1997 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2010 (or the corresponding key bindings
2018 ) you can change the level of sections.
2019 So you can for example make section
2020 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2036 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2039 \begin_layout Subsection
2040 Horizontal Scrolling
2041 \begin_inset Index idx
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2055 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2061 \begin_inset space \space{}
2065 \begin_inset space ~
2068 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2069 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2070 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2075 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2079 \begin_layout Itemize
2081 is used on a small tablet computer
2084 \begin_layout Itemize
2085 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 \begin_inset space ~
2110 \begin_layout Itemize
2111 Math constructs with long command names
2114 \begin_layout Standard
2115 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2116 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2118 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2119 windows so that table
2120 \begin_inset space ~
2124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2126 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2131 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2133 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2134 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2137 \begin_layout Standard
2138 \begin_inset Float table
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2151 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2155 Horizontal scrolling test.
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_inset Tabular
2166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2167 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Section
2213 Input/Word Completion
2214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2216 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2221 \begin_inset Index idx
2224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2231 \begin_inset Index idx
2234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2265 \begin_layout Standard
2267 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2269 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2270 is used to propose completions.
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2274 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2282 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2298 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2307 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2308 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2312 \begin_inset space ~
2318 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2319 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2320 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2321 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2324 \begin_layout Standard
2326 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2327 completions available.
2332 key to accept a proposed completion.
2333 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2334 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2335 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2342 \begin_layout Standard
2343 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2344 ing options for text.
2346 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2348 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2350 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2353 he special math option
2357 enables characters to be composed.
2358 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2359 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2362 , you can then input the characters
2363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2374 to a formula to get it.
2375 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2376 of the math toolbar.
2377 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2381 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2382 's installation folder.
2384 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2385 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2392 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2397 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2398 In the example above,
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2435 \begin_layout Section
2437 \begin_inset Index idx
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_inset Index idx
2450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2479 \begin_inset Index idx
2482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2513 \begin_layout Standard
2514 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2528 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2531 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2535 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2536 \begin_inset space ~
2540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2542 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2549 \begin_layout Standard
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2561 \begin_inset space ~
2582 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2586 \begin_layout Labeling
2587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2591 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2592 LatexCommand nomenclature
2594 description "Tabulator key"
2601 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2603 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2604 \begin_inset space ~
2608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2610 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2617 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2621 , especially section
2622 \begin_inset space ~
2626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2628 reference "subsec:Lists"
2634 If you are still confused, look in the
2639 \begin_inset Newline newline
2647 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2648 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2652 \begin_layout Labeling
2653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Escape key"
2668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2676 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2679 \begin_layout Labeling
2680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2686 \begin_inset space ~
2690 \begin_inset space ~
2697 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2698 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2703 There are three modifier keys:
2706 \begin_layout Labeling
2707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2726 LatexCommand nomenclature
2728 description "Control key"
2733 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2734 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2738 \begin_layout Itemize
2747 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2750 \begin_layout Itemize
2759 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2762 \begin_layout Itemize
2771 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2775 \begin_layout Labeling
2776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2794 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2795 LatexCommand nomenclature
2797 description "Shift key"
2802 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2803 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2806 \begin_layout Labeling
2807 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2825 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2826 LatexCommand nomenclature
2828 description "Alt or Meta key"
2833 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2834 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2835 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2841 \begin_inset Newline newline
2844 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2846 menu accelerator keys
2849 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2850 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2854 \begin_layout Standard
2855 For example, the sequence
2856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2862 \begin_inset space ~
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2872 \begin_inset space ~
2880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2899 \begin_inset space ~
2905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2920 manual lists all other things bound to the
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2931 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2932 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2933 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2934 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2935 The \SpecialChar LyX
2936 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2937 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2938 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2940 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2956 followed by a capital
2963 \begin_layout Chapter
2966 \begin_inset Index idx
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2979 \begin_layout Section
2981 \begin_inset Index idx
2984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2993 \begin_layout Subsection
2997 \begin_layout Standard
2998 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2999 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3000 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3001 numbering schemes, and so on.
3002 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3003 and format the title of your document differently.
3006 \begin_layout Standard
3011 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3012 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3013 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3014 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3015 picks one for you by default.
3016 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3019 \begin_layout Subsection
3021 \begin_inset Index idx
3024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3033 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3040 \begin_layout Standard
3041 You can select a class using the
3043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3044 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3048 \begin_inset Index idx
3051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3058 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3066 \begin_layout Standard
3067 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3072 \begin_layout Description
3073 Article for basic articles
3076 \begin_layout Description
3077 Report for basic reports
3080 \begin_layout Description
3081 Book for writing a book
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Letter for US-style letters
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3090 only uses if you have installed
3091 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3092 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3093 distributions will include
3095 Here are some of the classes.
3096 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3098 Special Document Classes
3107 \begin_layout Description
3108 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3111 \begin_layout Description
3112 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3116 \begin_layout Description
3117 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3121 \begin_layout Description
3122 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3123 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3124 There are three article layouts available.
3125 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3126 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3127 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3128 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3133 sequential numbering
3134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3137 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3138 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3139 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3140 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3143 \begin_layout Description
3144 Beamer Layout for presentations
3147 \begin_layout Description
3148 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3149 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3150 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3151 with \SpecialChar LyX
3155 \begin_layout Description
3156 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3159 \begin_layout Description
3161 \begin_inset space ~
3164 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3167 \begin_layout Description
3168 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3171 \begin_layout Description
3172 Foils Used to make transparencies
3175 \begin_layout Description
3176 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3177 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3178 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3179 with \SpecialChar LyX
3183 \begin_layout Description
3184 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3185 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3188 \begin_layout Description
3189 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3192 \begin_layout Description
3193 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3196 \begin_layout Description
3197 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3198 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3199 (Is used by this document.)
3202 \begin_layout Description
3203 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3206 \begin_layout Description
3207 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3210 \begin_layout Description
3215 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3216 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3218 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3222 \begin_layout Description
3223 Slides Used to make transparencies
3226 \begin_layout Description
3228 \begin_inset space ~
3231 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3232 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3235 \begin_layout Description
3236 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3239 \begin_layout Standard
3240 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3242 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3244 Special Document Classes
3251 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3252 of the document classes.
3255 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3259 \begin_layout Standard
3260 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3265 \begin_inset Index idx
3268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3285 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3286 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3288 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3291 \begin_layout Standard
3294 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3299 , are highly specialized.
3301 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3302 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3303 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3304 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3305 by some document class.
3306 There are just too many of them.
3307 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3310 \begin_layout Standard
3311 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3319 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3320 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3321 document class for a new file.
3323 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3326 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 manual for information on how to install them.
3334 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3342 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3343 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3344 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3345 class files to be used for dissertation
3346 s submitted to those universities.
3347 The \SpecialChar LyX
3348 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3350 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3354 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3360 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3367 name "subsec:Modules"
3372 \begin_inset Index idx
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3384 \begin_layout Standard
3385 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3386 chosen document class.
3387 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3388 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3399 \begin_inset Index idx
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3409 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3413 \begin_layout Standard
3414 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3415 packages or file format converters that are not always
3416 installed by default.
3418 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3419 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3420 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3421 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3423 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3424 file without the missing prerequisites.
3425 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3426 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3433 \begin_inset Index idx
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3443 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3448 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3451 \begin_layout Standard
3452 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3462 will advise you about these things.
3470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3474 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3479 \begin_inset Index idx
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 Document ! Local Layout
3491 \begin_layout Standard
3492 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3493 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3494 : They are intended to be used in
3495 a variety of different documents.
3496 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3497 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3498 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3499 need a specific inset or
3500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3505 style only that one time.
3506 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3508 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3526 manual for information on how to use it.
3529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3533 \begin_layout Standard
3534 Each class has a default set of options.
3535 Here's a quick table describing them:
3538 \begin_layout Standard
3539 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3545 \begin_layout Standard
3547 \begin_inset Tabular
3548 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3549 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3551 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3552 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4008 \begin_layout Standard
4009 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4015 \begin_layout Standard
4016 You're probably also wondering what
4017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4021 \begin_inset space ~
4025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4029 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4030 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4035 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4040 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4050 headings, there are also
4058 headings, and so on.
4059 We will describe these headings fully in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "subsec:Headings"
4073 \begin_layout Subsection
4075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4077 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4082 \begin_inset Index idx
4085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4092 \begin_inset Index idx
4095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 \begin_layout Standard
4105 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4114 \begin_inset space ~
4122 \begin_inset space ~
4127 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4129 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4130 doesn't support special options you want to
4131 use for your document.
4132 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4133 -class and its options, you have to read
4137 \begin_layout Standard
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4154 \begin_inset space ~
4159 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4160 You can choose between the following five options:
4163 \begin_layout Labeling
4164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4169 Use default page style of current class.
4172 \begin_layout Labeling
4173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4178 No page numbers or headings.
4181 \begin_layout Labeling
4182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4190 \begin_layout Labeling
4191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4196 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4197 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4198 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4199 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4202 \begin_layout Labeling
4203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4208 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4209 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4215 \begin_inset Index idx
4218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4226 How they are defined is explained in section
4227 \begin_inset space ~
4231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4233 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4240 \begin_layout Standard
4241 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4248 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4255 \begin_layout Subsection
4256 Paper Size and Orientation
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4261 Document ! Paper size
4267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4269 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4277 You can find the following options in the menu
4280 \begin_inset space ~
4287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4291 \begin_inset Index idx
4294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4303 \begin_layout Labeling
4304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4308 \begin_inset space ~
4313 What size paper to print on.
4318 \begin_layout Itemize
4324 \begin_layout Itemize
4330 \begin_layout Itemize
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4342 \begin_layout Itemize
4345 US letter, US legal, US executive
4348 \begin_layout Itemize
4354 \begin_layout Itemize
4361 \begin_layout Labeling
4362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4367 To choose whether to output as
4378 \begin_layout Labeling
4379 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4383 \begin_inset space ~
4388 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4389 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4392 \begin_layout Subsection
4394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4396 name "subsec:Margins"
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4411 \begin_inset Index idx
4414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4423 \begin_layout Standard
4424 Paper margins are set in the menu
4426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4430 \begin_inset Index idx
4433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 \begin_layout Standard
4443 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4444 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4445 the paper format and the font size into account.
4448 \begin_layout Subsection
4452 \begin_layout Standard
4453 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4459 That includes the paragraph environments.
4460 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4461 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4462 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4464 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4473 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4475 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4476 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4477 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4480 \begin_layout Section
4481 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4482 \begin_inset Index idx
4485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4486 Paragraph ! Indentation
4494 \begin_layout Subsection
4496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4498 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4505 \begin_layout Standard
4506 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4507 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4510 \begin_layout Standard
4511 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4512 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4513 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4514 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4518 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4524 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4525 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4526 language than English.
4528 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4531 \begin_layout Standard
4532 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4533 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4534 into \SpecialChar LyX
4536 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4539 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4541 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4542 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4543 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4550 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4551 goes to produce a printable file.
4556 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4558 gives you the ability globally to change
4562 these pre-coded spacings.
4563 We will explain more later.
4566 \begin_layout Subsection
4567 Paragraph Separation
4568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4570 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4575 \begin_inset Index idx
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 Paragraph ! Separation
4587 \begin_layout Standard
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4623 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4626 \begin_layout Subsection
4630 \begin_layout Standard
4631 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4634 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4636 \begin_inset space ~
4641 dialog and toggle the
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4649 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4652 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4656 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4657 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4663 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4666 \begin_layout Subsection
4668 \begin_inset Index idx
4671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4672 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4687 \begin_inset Index idx
4690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4699 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4703 \begin_inset space ~
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4713 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4719 \begin_inset Index idx
4722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 installed to use this feature.
4734 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4738 \begin_inset space ~
4743 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4744 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4747 \begin_layout Section
4748 Paragraph Environments
4749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4751 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4756 \begin_inset Index idx
4759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4760 Paragraph ! Environments
4766 \begin_inset Index idx
4769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4770 Paragraph environments|(
4778 \begin_layout Subsection
4782 \begin_layout Standard
4783 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4786 \begin_layout Standard
4795 } \SpecialChar ldots
4805 \begin_inset Newline newline
4808 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4810 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4811 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4812 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4821 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4824 \begin_layout Standard
4825 A paragraph environment is simply a
4826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4833 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4834 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4835 scheme, labels, and so on.
4836 Additionally, you can
4837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4844 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4845 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4846 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4847 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4849 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4851 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4854 \begin_layout Standard
4855 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4856 \begin_inset Graphics
4857 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4863 at the left end of the toolbar.
4865 will change the environment of the
4869 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4870 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4871 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4884 create a new paragraph using the
4888 paragraph environment.
4890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4897 because if you are in one of these environments:
4900 \begin_layout Itemize
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 \begin_layout Standard
4944 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4948 , rather than resetting it to
4953 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4960 reference "sec:Nesting"
4967 \begin_layout Subsection
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 The default paragraph environment is
4977 It creates a plain paragraph.
4979 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4980 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4981 this manual) are in the
4988 \begin_layout Standard
4989 You can nest a paragraph using the
4993 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5001 \begin_layout Subsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5017 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5026 for thanks or contact information.
5027 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5028 places all of this on a separate page
5029 along with today's date.
5030 For other types of documents, the title
5031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5038 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5042 \begin_layout Standard
5044 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5058 Here's how you use them:
5061 \begin_layout Itemize
5062 Put the title of your document in the
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5070 Put the author name in the
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5078 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5079 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5085 Note that using this environment is optional.
5086 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5087 will automatically insert today's date.
5088 If you don't want a date, use the option
5090 Suppress default date on front page
5094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5095 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5097 \begin_inset space ~
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 You can use footnotes to insert
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5114 or contact information.
5117 \begin_layout Subsection
5119 \begin_inset Index idx
5122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5131 name "subsec:Headings"
5138 \begin_layout Standard
5139 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5141 takes care of the numbering for you.
5144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5146 \begin_inset Index idx
5149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5150 Section headings ! Numbered
5158 \begin_layout Standard
5159 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5163 \begin_layout Enumerate
5169 \begin_layout Enumerate
5175 \begin_layout Enumerate
5181 \begin_layout Enumerate
5187 \begin_layout Enumerate
5193 \begin_layout Enumerate
5199 \begin_layout Enumerate
5205 \begin_layout Standard
5207 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5208 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5209 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5212 \begin_layout Standard
5213 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5214 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5215 You group the book into chapters.
5217 does a similar grouping:
5220 \begin_layout Itemize
5225 is divided into either
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5260 \begin_layout Itemize
5272 \begin_layout Itemize
5284 \begin_layout Itemize
5296 \begin_layout Standard
5297 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5305 Not all document types use the
5309 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5314 is the top-level heading.
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5327 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5328 labels it with its number,
5329 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5331 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5343 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5345 \begin_inset Index idx
5348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5349 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5357 \begin_layout Standard
5358 The unnumbered section headings have a
5359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5366 at the end of their name.
5367 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5368 the table of contents, see section
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5383 Changing the Numbering
5384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5386 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5395 in the Table of Contents.
5396 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5398 Just as certain classes start with
5412 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5422 This is something you can change.
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5432 \begin_inset Index idx
5435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5444 \begin_inset space ~
5448 \begin_inset space ~
5453 you will see two counters.
5458 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5459 numbers a section heading.
5460 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5465 Short Titles of Headings
5466 \begin_inset Index idx
5469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 Section headings ! Short titles
5476 \begin_inset Argument 1
5479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5495 \begin_layout Standard
5496 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5497 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5498 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5499 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5504 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5505 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5506 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5507 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5512 \begin_inset space ~
5518 This will insert a box labeled
5519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5523 \begin_inset space ~
5527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5530 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5531 This also works for captions inside floats.
5532 There can only be one short title per title.
5535 \begin_layout Standard
5536 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5543 \begin_layout Standard
5544 The following information applies to all section headings:
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5552 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5563 \begin_layout Subsection
5567 \begin_layout Standard
5569 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5583 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5584 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5585 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5586 the text they contain.
5587 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5595 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5599 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5608 when you start a new paragraph.
5609 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5613 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5614 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5615 have to change back to the
5619 environment yourself.
5622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5631 \begin_inset Index idx
5634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5643 \begin_layout Standard
5644 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5645 time for the differences.
5654 are identical except for one difference:
5658 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5667 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5670 \begin_layout Standard
5671 Here's an example of the
5684 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5686 See – no indentation!
5690 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5691 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5692 the other paragraph.
5695 \begin_layout Standard
5696 Here's another example, this time in the
5703 \begin_layout Quotation
5709 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5710 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5711 the first line, then
5715 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5719 you were quoting other text.
5722 \begin_layout Quotation
5723 Here's a new paragraph.
5724 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5725 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 As the examples show,
5733 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5734 They should put quotes in the
5739 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5743 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_inset Index idx
5751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5782 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5788 \begin_inset Newline newline
5791 Which I did not rehearse!
5795 It could be much worse.
5796 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5798 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5799 indented a bit more than the first.
5800 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5806 \begin_inset Newline newline
5809 And make things look fine
5810 \begin_inset Newline newline
5816 arg "newline-insert newline"
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5827 does not indent both margins.
5828 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5829 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5832 arg "newline-insert newline"
5838 \begin_layout Subsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5861 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5871 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5872 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5881 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5882 lets you provide your own label.
5883 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5884 describing some general features of all four of them.
5887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5891 \begin_layout Standard
5892 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5894 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5895 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5904 reset the environment to
5908 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5909 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5910 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5918 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5925 \begin_layout Standard
5926 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5927 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5928 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5930 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5931 you read all of section
5932 \begin_inset space ~
5936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5938 reference "sec:Nesting"
5945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5947 \begin_inset Index idx
5950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5966 \begin_layout Standard
5967 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5971 paragraph environment.
5972 It has the following properties:
5975 \begin_layout Itemize
5976 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5980 \begin_layout Itemize
5982 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5985 \begin_layout Itemize
5986 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5990 \begin_layout Itemize
5991 The items can have any length.
5993 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5994 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6001 \begin_layout Itemize
6006 environment inside another
6010 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6014 \begin_layout Itemize
6015 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Itemize
6020 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6023 \begin_layout Itemize
6025 \begin_inset space ~
6029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6031 reference "sec:Nesting"
6035 for a full explanation of nesting.
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6049 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6052 \begin_layout Standard
6053 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6054 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6057 \begin_layout Itemize
6058 The label for the first level
6062 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6066 \begin_layout Itemize
6067 The label for the second level is a dash.
6071 \begin_layout Itemize
6072 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6076 \begin_layout Itemize
6077 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6081 \begin_layout Itemize
6082 Back out to the third level.
6086 \begin_layout Itemize
6087 Back to the second level.
6091 \begin_layout Itemize
6092 Back to the outermost level.
6095 \begin_layout Standard
6096 These are the default labels for an
6101 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6106 dialog in the submenu
6111 \begin_inset Index idx
6114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6120 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6124 \begin_layout Standard
6125 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6126 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6128 \begin_inset space ~
6132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6134 reference "sec:Nesting"
6141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6143 \begin_inset Index idx
6146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6155 name "sec:Enumerate"
6162 \begin_layout Standard
6167 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6168 It has these properties:
6171 \begin_layout Enumerate
6172 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6176 \begin_layout Enumerate
6177 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6181 \begin_layout Enumerate
6183 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6186 \begin_layout Enumerate
6191 environment resets the counter to one.
6194 \begin_layout Enumerate
6207 \begin_layout Enumerate
6208 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6209 Items can have any length.
6212 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6216 \begin_layout Enumerate
6217 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6234 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6236 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6237 labels the four different levels in an
6244 \begin_layout Enumerate
6245 The first level of an
6249 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6253 \begin_layout Enumerate
6254 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6258 \begin_layout Enumerate
6259 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6263 \begin_layout Enumerate
6264 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6267 \begin_layout Enumerate
6268 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6273 \begin_layout Enumerate
6274 Back to the third level
6278 \begin_layout Enumerate
6279 Back to the second level.
6283 \begin_layout Enumerate
6284 Back to the outermost level.
6287 \begin_layout Standard
6288 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6292 environment, see section
6293 \begin_inset space ~
6297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6299 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6304 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6308 \begin_layout Standard
6309 There is more to nesting
6313 environments than we've stated here.
6314 You should read section
6315 \begin_inset space ~
6319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6321 reference "sec:Nesting"
6325 to learn more about nesting.
6328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6330 \begin_inset Index idx
6333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6347 list has no fixed label.
6348 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6357 of the first line as the label.
6361 \begin_layout Description
6362 Example: This is an example of the
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6371 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 it is meant that the first usage of the
6388 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6390 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6398 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6404 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6406 \begin_inset space ~
6412 \begin_inset space ~
6416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6418 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6422 for more information.) Here is an example:
6425 \begin_layout Description
6427 \begin_inset space ~
6430 Example: This one shows how to use a
6433 \begin_inset space ~
6445 \begin_layout Description
6446 Usage: You should use the
6450 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6451 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6453 It's not a good idea to use a
6457 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6458 You're better off using
6470 paragraphs into them.
6473 \begin_layout Description
6474 Nesting: You can nest
6478 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6482 \begin_layout Standard
6483 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6484 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6485 them from the first line.
6488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6490 \begin_inset Index idx
6493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6502 \begin_layout Standard
6507 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6508 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6512 \begin_layout Standard
6521 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6523 Here are its properties:
6526 \begin_layout Labeling
6527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6529 \begin_inset space ~
6532 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6541 of each line as the item label.
6546 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6547 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6548 space as described above.
6551 \begin_layout Labeling
6552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6553 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6554 uses different margins for the item label and the
6555 body of the item text.
6556 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6557 label width plus a little extra space.
6561 \begin_layout Labeling
6562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6564 \begin_inset space ~
6567 width \SpecialChar LyX
6568 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6569 If the label width is larger, the label
6570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6577 into the first line.
6578 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6579 margin of the rest of the item text.
6582 \begin_layout Labeling
6583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6585 \begin_inset space ~
6588 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6593 environment has the same left margin.
6594 \begin_inset Newline newline
6597 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6600 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6602 \begin_inset space ~
6607 dialog (toolbar button
6610 arg "layout-paragraph"
6617 \begin_inset space ~
6622 determines the default label width.
6623 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6632 multiple times instead.
6633 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6643 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6646 \begin_inset space ~
6651 every time you alter a label in a
6656 \begin_inset Newline newline
6659 The predefined default width is the length of
6660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6668 \begin_inset space ~
6674 \begin_layout Standard
6679 list the same way as the
6683 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6689 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6698 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6699 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6701 \begin_inset space ~
6705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6707 reference "sec:Nesting"
6711 to learn about nesting.
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6715 There is yet another feature of the
6719 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6720 left-justifies the item labels by
6722 You can use additional
6726 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6727 justifies the item label.
6732 are documented in section
6733 \begin_inset space ~
6737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6739 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6744 Here are some examples:
6747 \begin_layout Labeling
6748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6749 Left The default for
6756 \begin_layout Labeling
6757 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6758 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6765 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6768 \begin_layout Labeling
6769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6770 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6774 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6781 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6784 \begin_layout Subsection
6786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6788 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6793 \begin_inset Index idx
6796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 The features described in this section require that the module
6808 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6810 is loaded in the document settings.
6811 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6817 \begin_inset Index idx
6820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6831 Custom Enumerate Lists
6832 \begin_inset Index idx
6835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6844 \begin_layout Standard
6846 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6852 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6853 There you add the command
6856 \begin_layout Standard
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6878 Code, look at section
6879 \begin_inset space ~
6883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6885 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6898 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6905 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6906 For capital Roman numerals replace
6918 in the command above.
6919 For Arabic numerals use
6927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6934 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 You can only number 26
6960 \begin_inset space ~
6963 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6971 \begin_layout Standard
6972 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6973 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6980 \begin_layout Enumerate
6981 \begin_inset Argument 1
6984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7010 \begin_layout Enumerate
7011 \begin_inset Argument 1
7014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 \begin_layout Enumerate
7042 \begin_layout Enumerate
7043 \begin_inset Argument 1
7046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7070 \begin_layout Enumerate
7071 \begin_inset Argument 1
7074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7101 For this list these commands were used:
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7115 \begin_inset Newline newline
7123 \begin_inset Newline newline
7131 \begin_inset Newline newline
7141 \begin_layout Standard
7148 makes the label emphasized and
7157 \begin_layout Standard
7158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7166 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7167 lists until you change the definition.
7175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7177 \begin_inset Index idx
7180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7193 \begin_layout Enumerate
7194 \begin_inset Argument 1
7197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7216 \begin_inset Note Note
7219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7220 goes back to default numbering
7228 \begin_layout Enumerate
7232 \begin_layout Standard
7236 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7240 \begin_layout Standard
7241 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7246 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7247 to indicate that it is a resumed
7248 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7249 , but in the output.
7252 \begin_layout Standard
7253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7261 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7273 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7274 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7275 of a normal enumeration.
7276 There, insert the command
7279 \begin_layout Standard
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7290 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7294 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7302 \begin_layout Standard
7303 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 \begin_inset Argument 1
7310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7326 This enumeration starts at 4
7329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7331 \begin_inset Index idx
7334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7346 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7349 \begin_layout Itemize
7353 \begin_layout Itemize
7354 with standard spacing
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7358 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7360 Add there the command
7364 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7367 \begin_layout Itemize
7368 \begin_inset Argument 1
7371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7390 \begin_layout Itemize
7394 \begin_layout Itemize
7398 \begin_layout Standard
7399 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7406 \begin_inset Index idx
7409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7417 For more information see its documentation,
7418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7428 \begin_layout Standard
7429 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7431 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7432 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7436 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7439 \begin_layout Enumerate
7440 \begin_inset Argument 1
7443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7451 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7464 \begin_layout Enumerate
7465 with negative indentation
7468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 Further Customization
7470 \begin_inset Index idx
7473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7474 Lists ! Customization
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 You can also change the style of description lists.
7487 \begin_layout Standard
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 changes the description label font, the command
7497 \begin_layout Standard
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7504 sets the list style.
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7508 An example where the command
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7516 itshape, style=nextline
7519 \begin_layout Standard
7523 \begin_layout Description
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7529 \begin_inset Argument 1
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7538 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7540 itshape, style=nextline
7550 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7551 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7555 \begin_layout Description
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7560 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7561 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7562 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7565 \begin_layout Standard
7566 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7572 \begin_inset Index idx
7575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7583 For more information see its documentation
7584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7594 \begin_layout Subsection
7596 \begin_inset Index idx
7599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7610 \begin_inset space ~
7613 Address: An Overview
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7618 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7626 \begin_inset space ~
7632 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7633 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7634 gags on the document.
7635 In contrast, you can use the
7642 \begin_inset space ~
7647 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7648 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7652 \begin_layout Standard
7653 Of course, you're not limited to using
7660 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_inset space ~
7674 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7675 some European academic papers.
7678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7682 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7689 \begin_layout Standard
7694 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7695 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7699 \begin_inset space ~
7704 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7705 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7706 Here's an example of each:
7709 \begin_layout Right Address
7711 \begin_inset Newline newline
7715 \begin_inset Newline newline
7719 \begin_inset Newline newline
7722 When is it? What is today?
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7729 \begin_inset space ~
7735 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7737 the largest block of text on a single line.
7738 Here's an example of the
7745 \begin_layout Address
7747 \begin_inset Newline newline
7750 Where do I send this
7751 \begin_inset Newline newline
7754 Your post office and country
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 As you can see, both
7765 \begin_inset space ~
7770 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7775 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7776 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7782 This makes sense, since
7790 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7791 Thus, you have to use
7798 arg "newline-insert newline"
7803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7804 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7806 \begin_inset space ~
7810 \begin_inset space ~
7815 ) to start a new line in an
7822 \begin_inset space ~
7830 \begin_layout Subsection
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7835 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7836 or list of references.
7838 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7855 \begin_layout Standard
7860 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7861 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7862 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7863 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7877 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7878 The book document classes ignores the
7882 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7886 in a letter document class.
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment does several things for you.
7895 First, it puts the centered label
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7904 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7906 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7907 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7908 the subsequent text.
7909 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7911 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7915 \begin_layout Standard
7916 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7920 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7921 The new paragraph will still be in the
7926 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7927 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7930 \begin_layout Standard
7931 \begin_inset Float figure
7938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 \begin_inset Graphics
7941 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7949 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7954 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7976 We would love to demonstrate the
7980 environment, but since this document is in the
7981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7988 class, we can't do this.
7989 We inserted it therefore as figure
7990 \begin_inset space ~
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7996 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8001 If you have never heard of an
8002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8009 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8014 \begin_inset Index idx
8017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8026 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8033 \begin_layout Standard
8038 environment is used to list references.
8039 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8040 only use it at the end of the document.
8052 \begin_layout Standard
8053 When you first open a
8057 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8058 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8074 depending on the document class.
8075 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8076 Each paragraph of the
8080 environment is a bibliography entry.
8085 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8086 Each new paragraph is still in the
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8095 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8097 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8099 handling, have a look at section
8100 \begin_inset space ~
8104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8106 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8113 \begin_layout Subsection
8114 Special Environments
8117 \begin_layout Standard
8119 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8120 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8128 \begin_inset Index idx
8131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8141 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8148 \begin_layout Standard
8154 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8156 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8161 key as a fixed whitespace.
8165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8178 \begin_inset space ~
8183 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8201 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8204 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8207 arg "newline-insert newline"
8224 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8225 So, when you finish using the
8230 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8231 Also, you can nest the
8236 environment inside of others.
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8240 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8243 \begin_layout Itemize
8247 arg "newline-insert newline"
8250 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8255 \begin_inset space \space{}
8265 arg "newline-insert newline"
8271 \begin_layout Itemize
8275 arg "newline-insert newline"
8285 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8291 \begin_layout Itemize
8292 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8293 You must put at least one
8297 in any line you want blank.
8298 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8307 since that will insert
8312 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8315 arg "self-insert \""
8321 \begin_layout Standard
8325 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8329 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8341 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8342 printf("Hello World!
8347 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8351 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 This is just the standard
8357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8374 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8376 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8377 as if you used a typewriter.
8378 \begin_inset Index idx
8381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8382 Paragraph environments|)
8387 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8390 Program Code Listings
8395 \begin_inset space ~
8403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8407 \begin_inset Index idx
8410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8424 environment is similar to the
8429 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8430 computer console text.
8435 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8449 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8450 you can have empty lines.
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8464 have a certain language and a text style
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8469 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8470 and \SpecialChar TeX
8474 \begin_layout Standard
8475 Because of these properties
8479 works like a typewriter.
8483 \begin_layout Verbatim
8487 \begin_layout Verbatim
8490 The following 2 lines are empty:
8493 \begin_layout Verbatim
8497 \begin_layout Verbatim
8501 \begin_layout Verbatim
8502 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8507 \begin_layout Standard
8512 environment is identical to
8516 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8517 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8524 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8528 \begin_layout Section
8529 Nesting Environments
8530 \begin_inset Index idx
8533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8534 Nesting ! Environments
8540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8549 \begin_layout Subsection
8553 \begin_layout Standard
8555 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8557 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8559 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8561 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8573 \begin_layout Enumerate
8577 \begin_layout Enumerate
8582 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8591 \begin_layout Enumerate
8595 \begin_layout Standard
8596 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8597 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8599 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8601 \begin_inset space ~
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8617 \begin_inset space ~
8622 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8624 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8627 arg "depth-increment"
8633 arg "depth-decrement"
8647 arg "depth-increment"
8653 arg "depth-decrement"
8657 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8658 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8662 \begin_layout Standard
8663 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8664 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8665 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8666 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8667 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8670 \begin_layout Standard
8671 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8673 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8675 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8678 \begin_layout Subsection
8679 What You Can and Can't Nest
8682 \begin_layout Standard
8683 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8684 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8688 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8689 than a simple yes or no.
8690 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 Completely unnestable
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8707 \begin_layout Standard
8708 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8709 environments have them:
8712 \begin_layout Description
8713 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8714 Can't nest into them.
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Description
8751 \begin_inset space ~
8754 Nestable You can nest them.
8755 You can nest other things into them.
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8783 \begin_layout Itemize
8789 \begin_layout Itemize
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8801 \begin_layout Itemize
8808 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Description
8822 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8823 You can't nest anything into them.
8827 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8857 \begin_layout Itemize
8863 \begin_layout Itemize
8869 \begin_layout Itemize
8875 \begin_layout Itemize
8881 \begin_layout Itemize
8887 \begin_layout Itemize
8893 \begin_layout Itemize
8899 \begin_layout Itemize
8905 \begin_layout Itemize
8909 \begin_inset space ~
8915 \begin_layout Itemize
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8931 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8941 \begin_inset space ~
8944 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8945 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8946 nested section headings violate this.
8954 \begin_layout Subsection
8955 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8956 \begin_inset Index idx
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8960 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8968 \begin_layout Standard
8969 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8970 affected by nesting anyhow.
8974 \begin_layout Itemize
8978 \begin_layout Itemize
8982 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 \begin_layout Standard
8988 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 Figures and tables in
9000 are not affected by this.
9005 Have a look at section
9006 \begin_inset space ~
9010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9012 reference "sec:Floats"
9016 for more information about
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9025 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9026 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9030 \begin_layout Standard
9031 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9039 of its own, it behaves just like a
9040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9047 paragraph environment.
9048 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9052 \begin_layout Standard
9053 Here's an example with a table:
9056 \begin_layout Enumerate
9061 \begin_layout Enumerate
9062 This is (a) and it's nested.
9066 \begin_layout Standard
9067 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9073 \begin_layout Standard
9075 \begin_inset Tabular
9076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9077 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9079 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9163 \begin_layout Standard
9164 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9177 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 \begin_layout Standard
9182 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9196 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9204 \begin_inset Tabular
9205 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9206 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9309 \begin_layout Enumerate
9313 \begin_layout Standard
9314 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9318 \begin_layout Standard
9319 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9322 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9325 \begin_layout Enumerate
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 This is (a) and it's nested.
9334 \begin_layout Standard
9335 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9341 \begin_layout Standard
9343 \begin_inset Tabular
9344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9345 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9432 \begin_layout Standard
9433 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9439 \begin_layout Enumerate
9441 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9448 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 \begin_layout Standard
9453 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9459 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9460 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9464 \begin_layout Subsection
9465 Usage and General Features
9468 \begin_layout Standard
9469 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9470 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9479 is the innermost possible depth.
9480 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9483 \begin_layout Enumerate
9484 level #1 – outermost
9488 \begin_layout Enumerate
9493 \begin_layout Enumerate
9498 \begin_layout Enumerate
9503 \begin_layout Itemize
9508 \begin_layout Itemize
9517 \begin_layout Standard
9518 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9519 both of them in the example.
9520 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9530 For example, if we tried to nest another
9535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9542 , we would get errors.
9545 \begin_layout Subsection
9547 \begin_inset Index idx
9550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9559 \begin_layout Standard
9560 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9561 We have several examples of nested environments.
9562 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9566 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9567 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9570 \begin_layout Labeling
9571 \labelwidthstring MMM
9572 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9581 \begin_layout Labeling
9582 \labelwidthstring MMM
9583 #2-a This is level #2.
9584 We created it by using
9587 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9593 arg "depth-increment"
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9602 #3-a This is level #3.
9603 This time, we just enter
9610 arg "depth-increment"
9614 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9618 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9624 arg "depth-increment"
9631 \begin_layout Standard
9636 environment, nested inside of
9637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9645 So, it's at level #4.
9646 We did this by entering
9649 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9655 arg "depth-increment"
9658 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9663 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9679 \begin_layout Standard
9684 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9687 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9693 \begin_layout Labeling
9694 \labelwidthstring MMM
9695 #4-a This is level #4.
9699 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9702 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9707 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9711 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9716 keep nesting things inside
9717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9728 \begin_layout Labeling
9729 \labelwidthstring MMM
9730 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9735 \begin_layout Labeling
9736 \labelwidthstring MMM
9737 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9738 and this is level #6.
9739 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9743 \begin_layout Labeling
9744 \labelwidthstring MMM
9745 #5-b Back to level #5.
9749 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9755 arg "depth-decrement"
9762 \begin_layout Labeling
9763 \labelwidthstring MMM
9767 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9773 arg "depth-decrement"
9776 , we're back at level #4.
9780 \begin_layout Labeling
9781 \labelwidthstring MMM
9782 #3-b Back to level #3.
9783 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9787 \begin_layout Labeling
9788 \labelwidthstring MMM
9789 #2-b Back to level #2.
9794 \begin_layout Labeling
9795 \labelwidthstring MMM
9796 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9797 After this sentence, we will enter
9801 and change the paragraph environment back to
9808 \begin_layout Standard
9809 We could have also used the
9825 environment in place of the
9830 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9834 Example 2: Inheritance
9837 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9838 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9841 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9850 arg "depth-increment"
9854 \begin_inset Newline newline
9857 which, we will change to the
9865 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 environment, at level #2.
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 Notice how the nested
9878 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9882 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9886 \begin_layout Standard
9887 We ended this example by entering
9892 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9896 and reset the nesting depth by using
9899 arg "depth-decrement"
9905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9906 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9915 \begin_inset Argument 1
9918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9919 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9928 This is level #1, in an
9932 paragraph environment.
9933 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9937 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9948 arg "depth-increment"
9952 Now, what happens if we nest an
9956 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9957 label be? An asterisk?
9961 \begin_layout Itemize
9971 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9972 So, its label is a bullet.
9973 (We got here by using
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-increment"
9985 , then changing the environment to
9993 \begin_layout Itemize
9994 Here's level #4, produced using
9997 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10003 arg "depth-increment"
10007 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10012 \begin_layout Enumerate
10014 to get to level #5.
10015 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10020 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10024 , because we are in the
10032 environment (that is, it is an
10047 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10053 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10061 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10064 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10067 \begin_layout Enumerate
10071 arg "depth-decrement"
10074 to decrease the depth after the next
10077 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10084 \begin_layout Enumerate
10086 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10091 \begin_layout Enumerate
10093 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10094 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10098 \begin_layout Enumerate
10099 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10108 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10113 reset the counter for the label.
10117 \begin_layout Enumerate
10121 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10127 arg "depth-decrement"
10130 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10131 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10132 into the twofold-nested
10140 \begin_layout Enumerate
10141 The same thing happens if we do another
10144 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10150 arg "depth-decrement"
10153 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10157 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10162 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10173 The number of other
10177 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10184 The same rule applies for the
10188 environment, as well.
10191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10192 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10195 \begin_layout Enumerate
10196 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10197 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10198 the same detail with how we did it.
10207 \begin_layout Standard
10215 arg "depth-increment"
10222 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10223 the example in parentheses someplace.
10224 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10225 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10226 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10230 \begin_layout Enumerate
10235 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10239 \begin_layout Verse
10240 Now we will add verse.
10241 \begin_inset Newline newline
10244 It will get much worse.
10245 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-increment"
10265 \begin_layout Verse
10266 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10267 \begin_inset Newline newline
10270 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10285 \begin_layout Verse
10286 Here comes a table:
10290 \begin_layout Standard
10291 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10297 \begin_layout Standard
10299 \begin_inset Tabular
10300 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10301 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10303 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10388 \begin_layout Verse
10392 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10402 arg "depth-increment"
10408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10414 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 arg "depth-decrement"
10429 \begin_layout Enumerate
10434 : level #1) This is another item.
10435 Note that selecting a
10439 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10440 3 times to put the table inside the
10448 \begin_layout Quotation
10449 We're now ending the
10453 list and changing to
10458 We're still at level #1.
10459 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10460 The next set of paragraphs is a
10461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10468 We will nest both the
10475 \begin_inset space ~
10480 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10484 for the letter body.
10488 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10491 to preserve the depth.
10492 Remember that you need to use
10495 arg "newline-insert newline"
10498 to create multiple lines inside the
10505 \begin_inset space ~
10515 \begin_layout Right Address
10517 \begin_inset Newline newline
10520 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10521 \begin_inset Newline newline
10527 \begin_layout Address
10529 \begin_inset space ~
10535 \begin_layout Quotation
10536 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10540 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10541 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10542 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10543 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10544 as soon as possible.
10545 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10548 \begin_layout Quotation
10549 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10550 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10551 with your order, along with payment.
10554 \begin_layout Quotation
10555 We thank you again for your patience.
10558 \begin_layout Address
10560 \begin_inset Newline newline
10567 \begin_layout Quotation
10568 That ends that example!
10571 \begin_layout Standard
10572 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10573 gives you a lot of power with just
10575 We could have easily nested an
10596 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10599 \begin_layout Subsection
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10605 Nesting ! Separation
10611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10613 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10620 \begin_layout Standard
10621 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10623 For example you need two different enumerations:
10626 \begin_layout Enumerate
10631 \begin_layout Enumerate
10636 \begin_layout Enumerate
10640 \begin_layout Standard
10641 \begin_inset Separator plain
10647 \begin_layout Itemize
10653 \begin_layout Standard
10654 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10660 \begin_layout Enumerate
10664 \begin_layout Enumerate
10668 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 \begin_layout Standard
10673 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10674 list item and use the menu
10676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10677 Separated <Name> Above
10681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10682 Separated <Name> Below
10685 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10686 ) and before or behind it the
10688 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10691 \begin_layout Standard
10692 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10693 (red arrow in LyX).
10694 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10695 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10698 \begin_layout Standard
10699 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10702 arg "paragraph-break"
10709 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10712 \begin_layout Section
10713 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10714 \begin_inset Index idx
10717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10726 \begin_layout Standard
10727 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10728 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10730 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10731 be broken at the end of a line.
10732 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10736 \begin_layout Subsection
10738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10740 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10745 \begin_inset Index idx
10748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10757 \begin_layout Standard
10758 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10759 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10760 ) not to break the line at
10762 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10765 \begin_layout Quote
10766 Further documentation is given in section
10767 \begin_inset Newline newline
10771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10773 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10781 \begin_layout Standard
10782 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10797 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10806 A protected space is set with
10808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10809 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10811 \begin_inset space ~
10819 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10825 \begin_layout Subsection
10827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10829 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10834 \begin_inset Index idx
10837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10838 Spacing ! Horizontal
10846 \begin_layout Standard
10847 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10850 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10854 The length units are listed in Appendix
10855 \begin_inset space ~
10859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10861 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10872 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10877 \begin_inset Index idx
10880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10881 Spaces ! Inter-word
10889 \begin_layout Standard
10890 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10891 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10892 at the ends of sentences.
10893 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10894 automatically takes care about this.
10895 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10896 followed by a period; see section
10897 \begin_inset space ~
10901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10903 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10908 To insert a normal space, select
10910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10921 arg "space-insert normal"
10927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10931 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10936 \begin_inset Index idx
10939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10948 \begin_layout Standard
10950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10957 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10966 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10967 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10968 inside abbreviations:
10971 \begin_layout Quote
10973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10977 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10980 \begin_layout Standard
10981 or between values and units.
10982 Compare for example this:
10983 \begin_inset Newline newline
10987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 \begin_inset Newline newline
10994 10 kg (normal space
10997 \begin_layout Standard
10998 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11001 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11003 \begin_inset space ~
11011 arg "space-insert thin"
11017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11021 \begin_layout Standard
11022 You can also insert the following space types:
11025 \begin_layout Description
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space ~
11034 space A line with a
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11039 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 negative thin space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11058 space A line with a
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11070 negative medium space between the arrows.
11073 \begin_layout Description
11075 \begin_inset space ~
11079 \begin_inset space ~
11082 space A line with a
11083 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11087 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11091 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11094 negative thick space between the arrows.
11097 \begin_layout Description
11099 \begin_inset space ~
11103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11107 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11111 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11115 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11119 \begin_inset space ~
11123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11126 em) space between the arrows.
11129 \begin_layout Description
11131 \begin_inset space ~
11135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11139 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11143 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11147 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11151 \begin_inset space ~
11155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11158 em) space between the arrows.
11161 \begin_layout Description
11163 \begin_inset space ~
11167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11175 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11179 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11183 \begin_inset space ~
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11190 em) space between the arrows.
11193 \begin_layout Description
11195 \begin_inset space ~
11199 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11203 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11208 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11215 cm space between the arrows.
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11220 \begin_inset space ~
11224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11226 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11230 lists the different space sizes.
11233 \begin_layout Standard
11234 \begin_inset Float table
11241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11242 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11247 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11251 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11261 \begin_inset Tabular
11262 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11263 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11264 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11381 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11540 \begin_inset Index idx
11543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11552 \begin_layout Standard
11553 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11554 feature for adding extra space
11555 in a uniform fashion.
11556 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11557 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11558 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11559 equally between themselves.
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11563 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11566 \begin_layout Quote
11568 This is on the left side
11569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11572 This is on the right
11575 \begin_layout Quote
11578 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11588 \begin_layout Quote
11591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11595 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11599 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11606 That was an example in the
11612 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11620 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11623 is one in a standard paragraph.
11624 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11628 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11631 \begin_layout Standard
11632 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11635 \begin_inset space ~
11640 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11643 \begin_layout Standard
11645 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11649 \begin_inset space ~
11655 \begin_layout Standard
11657 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11667 \begin_layout Standard
11669 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11673 \begin_inset space ~
11679 \begin_layout Standard
11681 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_layout Standard
11693 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11697 \begin_inset space ~
11703 \begin_layout Standard
11705 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11709 \begin_inset space ~
11715 \begin_layout Standard
11716 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11724 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11728 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11730 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11731 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11735 option in the space dialog.
11743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11766 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11770 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11773 What is correct English?:
11774 \begin_inset Newline newline
11778 \begin_inset Newline newline
11782 \begin_inset space ~
11785 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11786 \begin_inset Newline newline
11790 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 \begin_inset Newline newline
11805 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11816 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11822 \begin_layout Standard
11824 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11829 \begin_inset space ~
11833 \begin_inset space ~
11837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11841 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11844 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11848 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11854 \begin_inset space ~
11858 \begin_inset space ~
11862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11865 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11874 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11875 That is why it is named
11876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11884 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11885 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11889 \begin_layout Subsection
11891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11893 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11898 \begin_inset Index idx
11901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11910 \begin_layout Standard
11911 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11914 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11916 \begin_inset space ~
11922 There you find the following sizes:
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11938 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11939 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11944 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 \begin_inset space ~
11955 \begin_inset Index idx
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11959 Document ! Settings
11964 for the paragraph separation.
11965 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11976 \begin_layout Standard
11982 \begin_inset Index idx
11985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11991 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11992 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11997 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11998 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12007 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12016 s are described in section
12017 \begin_inset space ~
12021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12023 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12032 If there are several
12036 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12037 You can therefore use
12041 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12044 \begin_layout Standard
12049 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12050 \begin_inset space ~
12054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12056 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12064 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12075 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12087 \begin_layout Subsection
12088 Paragraph Alignment
12089 \begin_inset Index idx
12092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12093 Paragraph ! Alignment
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12102 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12104 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12107 dialog (toolbar button
12110 arg "layout-paragraph"
12114 There are five possibilities:
12117 \begin_layout Itemize
12125 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12131 \begin_layout Itemize
12139 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12145 \begin_layout Itemize
12153 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12159 \begin_layout Itemize
12167 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12173 \begin_layout Itemize
12181 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12187 \begin_layout Standard
12188 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12189 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12190 the left and right margins.
12191 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12194 \begin_layout Standard
12196 This paragraph is right aligned,
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12201 this one is centered,
12204 \begin_layout Standard
12206 this one is left aligned.
12209 \begin_layout Subsection
12211 \begin_inset Index idx
12214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12215 Page breaks ! Forced
12221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12223 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12230 \begin_layout Standard
12231 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12232 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12233 force a page break where you want one.
12234 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12235 is good at page breaking.
12236 Only if you use a lot of
12240 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12241 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12246 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12250 have to change the page breaking.
12253 \begin_layout Standard
12254 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12256 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12261 \begin_inset space ~
12267 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12277 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12279 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12280 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12283 \begin_layout Standard
12284 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12285 at the top of a page.
12286 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12288 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12289 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12290 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12298 to learn more about
12305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12309 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12314 \begin_inset Index idx
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12318 Page breaks ! Clear
12326 \begin_layout Standard
12327 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12328 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12329 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12330 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12331 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12334 \begin_layout Standard
12335 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12338 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12340 \begin_inset space ~
12346 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12351 \begin_inset space ~
12355 \begin_inset space ~
12360 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12361 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12364 \begin_layout Subsection
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12378 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12386 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12388 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12391 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12393 \begin_inset space ~
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12405 arg "newline-insert newline"
12409 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12412 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12414 \begin_inset space ~
12418 \begin_inset space ~
12426 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12429 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12431 This is useful to avoid
12432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12439 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12442 \begin_layout Standard
12443 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12444 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12446 very good at line breaking.
12447 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12448 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12449 \begin_inset space ~
12453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12455 reference "sec:Quote"
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12462 reference "sec:Verse"
12467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12469 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12476 \begin_layout Subsection
12478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12480 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12485 \begin_inset Index idx
12488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12499 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12510 \begin_layout Standard
12514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12515 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12517 \begin_inset space ~
12522 you can insert horizontal lines.
12523 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12524 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12525 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12528 \begin_layout Standard
12530 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12541 \begin_layout Section
12542 Characters and Symbols
12545 \begin_layout Standard
12546 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12547 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12548 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12556 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12560 for information on how this is done.
12563 \begin_layout Standard
12564 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12569 dialog via the menu
12571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12572 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12587 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12588 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12590 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12598 \begin_layout Section
12599 Fonts and Text Styles
12600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12602 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12609 \begin_layout Subsection
12611 \begin_inset Index idx
12614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12623 \begin_layout Standard
12624 There are two types of fonts:
12627 \begin_layout Description
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12633 \begin_inset Index idx
12636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12642 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12647 characters) in the font.
12648 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12649 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12650 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12651 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12652 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12653 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12654 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12655 \begin_inset Newline newline
12658 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12659 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12660 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12661 sizes than at small ones.
12662 \begin_inset Newline newline
12676 \begin_inset space ~
12684 \begin_layout Description
12686 \begin_inset space ~
12690 \begin_inset Index idx
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12699 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12700 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12701 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12702 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12703 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12704 image manipulation program.
12705 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12706 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12707 \begin_inset space ~
12710 pixels high up to 34
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12714 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12715 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12716 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12718 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12719 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12720 \begin_inset Newline newline
12723 Bitmap fonts are named
12726 \begin_inset space ~
12731 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12736 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12737 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12738 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12739 use scalable fonts.
12742 \begin_layout Standard
12743 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12749 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12754 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12755 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12756 font to emphasize text, you use an
12757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12765 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12767 In \SpecialChar LyX
12768 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12772 \begin_layout Subsection
12775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12777 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12784 \begin_layout Standard
12785 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12786 used its own fonts.
12787 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12788 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12791 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12793 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12794 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12795 to a word processor.
12796 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12797 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12798 files are very portable across
12799 different machines.
12800 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12801 has increased a lot
12802 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12805 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12813 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12818 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12819 code in the document
12820 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12823 \begin_layout Standard
12824 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12825 engines that are also able directly
12826 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12828 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12830 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12832 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12833 that is installed on your system.
12834 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12846 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12847 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12855 \begin_layout Subsection
12856 Document Font and Font size
12857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12859 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12864 \begin_inset Index idx
12867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12874 \begin_inset Index idx
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12886 \begin_layout Standard
12887 You can set the document fonts in the
12889 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12893 \begin_inset Index idx
12896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12897 Document ! Settings
12907 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12908 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12911 \begin_inset space ~
12920 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12922 \begin_inset space ~
12925 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12928 \begin_layout Standard
12933 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12934 This requires that you use
12946 as the output format, i.
12947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12951 \begin_inset space \space{}
12954 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12955 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12956 installed (see section
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12963 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12968 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12970 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12971 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12976 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12977 cannot determine the family.
12978 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12979 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12982 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12986 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12987 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12992 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12998 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13000 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13002 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13005 font encoding, this is
13006 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13007 , depending on the document language,
13010 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13011 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13035 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13036 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13044 \begin_inset space ~
13050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13058 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13079 European Computer Modern
13082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13090 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13093 \begin_layout Standard
13098 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13099 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13104 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13112 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13118 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13119 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13122 \begin_layout Itemize
13126 \begin_inset space ~
13131 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13149 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13150 community in order to replace
13154 as the default font.
13155 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13156 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13173 One difference is improved kerning.
13181 \begin_layout Itemize
13182 If you do not like the look of
13190 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13195 \begin_inset space ~
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13211 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13215 serif and typewriter fonts,
13219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13220 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13227 \begin_inset space ~
13236 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13241 \begin_inset space \space{}
13249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13253 \begin_inset space \space{}
13259 \begin_inset space ~
13267 \begin_inset space ~
13277 but you can also select your own.
13278 \begin_inset Newline newline
13281 The differences between roman,
13284 \begin_inset space ~
13293 fonts are explained in section
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13300 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13305 \begin_inset Newline newline
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13316 was originally designed for newspapers.
13317 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13318 into the small newspaper columns.
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13327 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13330 \begin_layout Standard
13331 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13344 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13349 depends on the class you are using.
13350 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13354 Note that the font size is the
13359 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13360 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13361 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13362 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13365 \begin_inset space ~
13371 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13378 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13385 \begin_layout Standard
13389 \begin_inset space ~
13394 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13396 \begin_inset space ~
13399 serif or typewriter.
13404 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13414 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13417 \begin_layout Standard
13422 LaTeX font encoding
13424 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13425 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13431 \begin_inset Index idx
13434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13442 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13444 \begin_inset space ~
13448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13450 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13457 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13458 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13459 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13463 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13471 \begin_layout Standard
13472 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13474 Use Old Style Figures
13478 Use True Small Caps
13481 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13484 Use Old Style Figures
13486 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13488 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13496 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13500 Use True Small Caps
13502 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13503 of scaled capitals.
13504 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13505 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13506 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13512 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13513 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13514 provided by the font package (or the
13518 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13523 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13529 \begin_layout Standard
13534 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13535 a font to display the script characters.
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13546 \begin_inset Index idx
13549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13556 So this has no effect for the document language
13572 \begin_layout Standard
13575 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13577 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13578 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13584 \begin_inset Index idx
13587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13589 packages ! microtype
13598 \begin_layout Standard
13601 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13603 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13608 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13609 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13615 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13622 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13632 \begin_layout Standard
13633 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13645 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13650 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13651 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13653 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13655 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13658 dialog, see section
13659 \begin_inset space ~
13663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13665 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13677 \begin_layout Subsection
13681 \begin_layout Standard
13682 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13683 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13685 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13686 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13687 choose a math font in the dialog
13689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13693 \begin_inset Index idx
13696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13697 Document ! Settings
13703 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13704 automatically selects a math font.
13705 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13706 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13715 \begin_inset space ~
13721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13726 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13727 document font is available.
13730 \begin_layout Standard
13731 Note that the math font will not be used for
13735 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13741 or by the insertion of the command
13748 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13749 \begin_inset space ~
13753 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13754 while the math characters do not.
13756 \begin_inset space ~
13759 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13762 \begin_inset space ~
13770 \begin_inset space ~
13775 in the document font settings.
13778 \begin_layout Standard
13779 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13780 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13781 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13782 font (in most cases
13783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13789 \begin_inset space ~
13795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13798 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13799 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13807 \begin_inset space ~
13813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13819 \begin_layout Subsection
13821 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13831 name "subsec:charstyles"
13838 \begin_inset Index idx
13841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13848 \begin_inset Index idx
13851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13860 \begin_layout Standard
13861 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13862 automatically changes the
13863 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13866 style for certain paragraph environments.
13868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13869 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13871 This is where we meet the concept of
13877 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13883 \begin_layout Standard
13885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13890 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13892 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13905 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13914 e., available with all document classes.
13915 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13919 for specific purposes.
13920 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13923 \begin_layout Standard
13925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13926 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13936 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13940 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13953 — you customized the
13958 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13959 among them, encourage the use of
13971 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13972 \begin_inset space ~
13976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13978 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13983 Rather than fiddling with
13987 , they encourage the use of
13991 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13996 \begin_inset Quotes els
14000 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14003 ), not their form (
14004 \begin_inset Quotes els
14008 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14012 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14013 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14014 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14015 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14016 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14017 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14023 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14027 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14028 With a semantic markup (such as
14032 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14037 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14039 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14040 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14043 \begin_layout Standard
14045 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14046 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14047 by \SpecialChar LyX
14053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14055 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14056 Builtin Text Styles
14057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14059 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14066 \begin_layout Standard
14068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14069 The two builtin text styles can be
14070 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14079 both of these styles
14082 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14090 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14096 \begin_layout Standard
14101 style, do one of the following:
14104 \begin_layout Itemize
14105 click on the toolbar button
14114 \begin_layout Itemize
14115 use the key binding
14122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14126 \begin_layout Itemize
14128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14136 arg "dialog-show character"
14142 arg "dialog-show character"
14145 ) as described in section
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14152 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14161 \begin_layout Standard
14162 These commands are all toggles.
14167 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14170 \begin_layout Standard
14171 One typically uses the
14175 style for proper names.
14177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14184 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14194 \begin_layout Standard
14196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14201 is producing text in
14205 , but the definition can be changed.
14210 \begin_layout Standard
14212 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14222 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14229 \begin_layout Itemize
14230 clicking on the toolbar button
14239 \begin_layout Itemize
14240 using the keybindings
14247 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14251 \begin_layout Itemize
14253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14261 arg "dialog-show character"
14267 arg "dialog-show character"
14270 ) as described in section
14271 \begin_inset space ~
14275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14277 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14286 \begin_layout Standard
14291 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14295 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14298 packages use a different font
14299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14300 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14306 \begin_layout Standard
14307 We've been using the
14311 style all over the place in this document.
14312 Here's one more example:
14315 \begin_layout Quotation
14319 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14327 \begin_layout Standard
14328 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14329 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14330 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14331 the common tendency to overuse
14332 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14343 \begin_layout Standard
14345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14346 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14347 only as font changes and integrated in the
14355 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14358 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14371 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14374 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14376 \begin_inset space ~
14379 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14387 arg "dialog-show character"
14393 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14395 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14401 arg "dialog-show character"
14405 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14415 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14422 \begin_layout Standard
14424 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14425 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14427 \begin_inset space ~
14431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14433 reference "subsec:Modules"
14440 ), or local layout settings (see section
14441 \begin_inset space ~
14445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14447 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14452 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14456 markup for specific functions.
14457 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14462 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14472 \begin_inset Quotes els
14476 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14482 \begin_layout Standard
14484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14485 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14493 \begin_layout Standard
14495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14496 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14501 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14502 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14503 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14508 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14509 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14522 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14523 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14524 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14525 \begin_inset Flex Code
14528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14539 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14553 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14558 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14567 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14568 on screen their formal appearance.
14573 \begin_layout Subsection
14575 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14595 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14597 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14603 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14608 \begin_inset Index idx
14611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14620 \begin_layout Standard
14621 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14622 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14625 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14627 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14629 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14633 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14634 the properties of text passages
14635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14639 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14640 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14641 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14642 from ordinary dialog.
14643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14647 \begin_layout Standard
14649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14650 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14651 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14652 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14653 the properties of the respective text passages.
14658 comes in as a last resort.
14663 \begin_layout Standard
14664 Before we document how to
14665 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14666 use custom character style
14667 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14668 tweak the text properties
14670 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14677 \begin_inset Newline newline
14680 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14681 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14684 \begin_layout Standard
14686 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14687 use custom character styles
14688 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14689 tweak text properties
14692 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14695 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14697 \begin_inset space ~
14700 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14702 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14708 arg "dialog-show character"
14713 dialog or press the toolbar button
14716 arg "dialog-show character"
14721 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14724 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14725 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14730 property that you can choose.
14731 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14734 \begin_inset space ~
14739 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14741 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14752 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14753 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14754 environments all at once.
14757 \begin_layout Standard
14759 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14761 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14764 properties, and their options (in addition to
14767 \begin_inset space ~
14773 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14785 \begin_layout Labeling
14786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14800 The possible options are:
14804 \begin_layout Labeling
14805 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14810 This is the Roman font family.
14811 Normally a serif font.
14812 It's also the default family.
14822 \begin_layout Labeling
14823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14827 \begin_inset space ~
14834 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14846 \begin_layout Labeling
14847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14854 This is the Typewriter font family.
14860 arg "font-typewriter"
14866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14870 \begin_layout Standard
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14873 The general differences of these families are:
14876 \begin_layout Itemize
14878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14883 fonts use characters with serifs.
14884 These are the small
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14892 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14893 The following example shows the difference:
14894 \begin_inset Newline newline
14898 \begin_inset Newline newline
14903 text without serifs
14906 \begin_inset Newline newline
14909 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14910 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14917 \begin_layout Itemize
14919 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14924 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14925 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14926 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14929 \begin_layout Itemize
14931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14944 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14962 \begin_inset Newline newline
14966 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14982 \begin_inset Note Note
14985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14988 For more on phantoms see section
14989 \begin_inset space ~
14993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14995 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15005 \begin_inset Newline newline
15014 \begin_layout Labeling
15015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15020 This corresponds to the print weight.
15025 \begin_layout Labeling
15026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15031 This is the Medium font series.
15032 It's also the default series.
15035 \begin_layout Labeling
15036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15043 This is the Bold font series.
15056 \begin_layout Labeling
15057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15062 As the name implies.
15067 \begin_layout Labeling
15068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15073 This is the Upright font shape.
15074 It's also the default shape.
15077 \begin_layout Labeling
15078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15093 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15098 s the Italic font shape
15104 \begin_layout Labeling
15105 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15112 This is the Slanted font shape
15114 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15115 , this is different from italic).
15118 \begin_layout Labeling
15119 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15123 \begin_inset space ~
15130 This is the Small caps font shape
15137 \begin_layout Labeling
15138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15143 Alters the text color.
15144 Note that not all DVI
15145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15147 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15150 viewers are able to display colors.
15152 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15158 \begin_inset space ~
15165 , which means that the document default color set in
15167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 \begin_inset space ~
15180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15266 \begin_inset Index idx
15269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15278 \begin_layout Labeling
15279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15284 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15285 the language of the document.
15286 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15288 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15291 in blue to indicate the change
15292 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15293 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15297 \begin_inset Newline newline
15300 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15302 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15303 When using the spell checking (see section
15304 \begin_inset space ~
15308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15310 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15314 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15315 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15317 \begin_inset Newline newline
15320 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15322 Exclude from Spellchecking
15325 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15328 \begin_layout Labeling
15329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15334 Alters the size of the font.
15336 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15345 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15346 document font size.
15347 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15348 the details, but a general description of what
15354 \begin_layout Labeling
15355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15376 arg "font-size tiny"
15382 \begin_layout Labeling
15383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15410 \begin_layout Labeling
15411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15432 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15438 \begin_layout Labeling
15439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15460 arg "font-size small"
15466 \begin_layout Labeling
15467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15481 It's also the default size.
15485 arg "font-size normal"
15491 \begin_layout Labeling
15492 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15513 arg "font-size large"
15519 \begin_layout Labeling
15520 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15541 arg "font-size larger"
15547 \begin_layout Labeling
15548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15569 arg "font-size largest"
15575 \begin_layout Labeling
15576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 arg "font-size huge"
15603 \begin_layout Labeling
15604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 arg "font-size giant"
15631 \begin_layout Labeling
15632 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15637 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15657 arg "font-size increase"
15663 \begin_layout Labeling
15664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15669 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15689 arg "font-size decrease"
15696 \begin_layout Standard
15701 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15702 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15704 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15705 — use those instead.
15706 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15709 \begin_layout Labeling
15710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15712 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15722 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15723 change a few other things at the character level
15724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15725 have text passages being underlined
15729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15730 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15731 days, when you could not change fonts.
15732 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15733 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15734 because some people
15738 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15745 \begin_layout Labeling
15746 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15748 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15755 This is text with emphasize on
15758 This might seem like the same as
15762 , but it is actually a bit different.
15768 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15770 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15771 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15775 \begin_layout Labeling
15776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15783 Don't use underlining.
15788 \begin_layout Labeling
15789 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15791 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15795 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15805 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15814 arg "font-underline"
15820 \begin_inset Newline newline
15824 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15827 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15828 when you could not change fonts.
15829 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15830 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15831 because some people
15835 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15840 \begin_layout Labeling
15841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15845 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15847 \begin_inset space ~
15856 This is text with Double under
15857 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15868 arg "font-underunderline"
15872 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15874 \begin_inset Newline newline
15877 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15878 about double underbar
15883 \begin_layout Labeling
15884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15888 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15890 \begin_inset space ~
15899 This is text with Wavy under
15900 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15911 arg "font-underwave"
15915 \begin_inset Newline newline
15918 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15919 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15920 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15925 \begin_layout Labeling
15926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15928 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15933 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15939 \begin_layout Labeling
15940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15947 Don't use strikethrough.
15950 \begin_layout Labeling
15951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15955 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15957 \begin_inset space ~
15961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15969 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15972 Single strikethrough
15980 arg "font-strikeout"
15984 \begin_inset Newline newline
15987 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15988 changed in the meantime.
15991 \begin_layout Labeling
15992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15994 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15998 \begin_inset space ~
16002 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16004 \begin_inset space ~
16008 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16016 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16018 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16024 \begin_inset Newline newline
16027 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16031 \begin_layout Standard
16033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16034 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16035 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16036 \begin_inset space ~
16040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16042 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16049 \begin_layout Itemize
16051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16058 This is text with emphasize on
16063 \begin_layout Itemize
16067 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16074 This is text with Noun on.
16076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16083 , this is a logical attribute.
16084 Normally it's equivalent to
16087 \begin_inset space ~
16097 \begin_layout Standard
16098 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16101 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16106 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16107 chosen a new character style
16108 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16109 applied a text property
16112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16115 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16117 \begin_inset space ~
16120 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16128 arg "dialog-show character"
16136 arg "dialog-show character"
16139 ) dialog, the settings are
16140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16144 You can activate the
16145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16148 last applied properties
16150 by using the toolbar button
16153 arg "textstyle-apply"
16157 The button lets you apply
16158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16159 your custom character style
16160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16163 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16165 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16166 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16167 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16168 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16173 \begin_layout Standard
16174 To completely reset the
16175 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16177 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16178 text properties of a selection
16180 to the default, use
16181 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16183 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16193 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16198 from the menu of the toolbar button
16201 arg "textstyle-apply"
16208 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16209 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16210 you just set the shape to
16211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16229 \begin_inset space ~
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16246 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16254 \begin_inset space ~
16266 \begin_layout Itemize
16268 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16281 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16299 \begin_inset Newline newline
16303 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 \begin_inset Note Note
16320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16321 For more on phantoms see section
16322 \begin_inset space ~
16326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16328 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16338 \begin_inset Newline newline
16344 \begin_layout Itemize
16346 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16351 fonts use characters with serifs.
16352 These are the small
16353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16360 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16361 The following example shows the difference:
16362 \begin_inset Newline newline
16366 \begin_inset Newline newline
16371 text without serifs
16374 \begin_inset Newline newline
16377 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16378 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16385 \begin_layout Itemize
16387 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16392 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16393 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16394 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16399 \begin_layout Standard
16401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16409 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16410 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16413 \begin_inset space ~
16418 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16419 the property to be removed.
16420 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16421 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16422 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16440 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16441 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16449 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16453 \begin_inset space ~
16458 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16469 If you, for example, set
16470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16488 \begin_inset space ~
16493 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16502 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16507 \begin_layout Standard
16509 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16512 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16513 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16516 \begin_layout Section
16517 Printing and Previewing
16520 \begin_layout Subsection
16524 \begin_layout Standard
16525 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16526 using \SpecialChar LyX
16527 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16528 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16529 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16530 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16532 Additional Features
16537 \begin_layout Standard
16539 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16542 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16543 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16544 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16547 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16548 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16549 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16550 to turn your writing into printable output.
16551 This happens in two stages:
16554 \begin_layout Enumerate
16555 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16556 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16558 a file with the extension,
16559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16573 \begin_layout Enumerate
16574 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16575 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16576 to use the commands in the
16580 file to produce printable output.
16583 \begin_layout Subsection
16584 Output file formats
16585 \begin_inset Index idx
16588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16597 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16605 Simple text (ASCII)
16606 \begin_inset Index idx
16609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16610 File formats ! ASCII
16618 \begin_layout Standard
16619 This file type has the extension
16620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16636 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16646 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16647 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16655 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16656 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16657 bibliography (section
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16664 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16669 If your document includes such material, use
16671 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16672 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16674 \begin_inset space ~
16678 \begin_inset space ~
16682 \begin_inset space ~
16690 \begin_inset space ~
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16700 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16701 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16707 \begin_inset Index idx
16710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16711 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16721 This file type has the extension
16722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16733 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16736 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16737 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16738 -Errors or to process it manually
16739 with console commands.
16740 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16741 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16742 's temporary directory whenever you
16743 view or export your document.
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16747 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16748 -file using the menu
16750 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16751 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16755 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16756 export variants are explained in section
16757 \begin_inset space ~
16761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16763 reference "subsec:Export"
16770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16772 \begin_inset Index idx
16775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16784 \begin_layout Standard
16785 This file type has the extension
16786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16806 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16807 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16808 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16812 \begin_layout Standard
16813 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16814 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16815 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16816 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16817 when you view the DVI.
16818 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16821 \begin_layout Standard
16822 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16824 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16825 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16831 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16833 \begin_inset space ~
16839 The latter option uses the program
16841 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16847 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16850 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16851 font access (see section
16852 \begin_inset space ~
16856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16858 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16863 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16864 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16871 \begin_inset Index idx
16874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16875 File formats ! PostScript
16883 \begin_layout Standard
16884 This file type has the extension
16885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16897 PostScript was developed by the company
16901 as a printer language.
16902 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16904 PostScript can be seen as a
16905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16908 programming language
16909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16912 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16917 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16924 \begin_inset Index idx
16927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16929 packages ! pstricks
16939 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16942 \begin_layout Standard
16943 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16947 Encapsulated PostScript
16948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16951 (EPS, file extension
16952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16964 As \SpecialChar LyX
16965 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16966 convert them in the background to EPS.
16967 If, for example, you have 50
16968 \begin_inset space ~
16971 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16973 \begin_inset space ~
16976 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16977 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16979 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16980 EPS to avoid this problem.
16983 \begin_layout Standard
16984 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16986 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16987 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16995 \begin_inset Index idx
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17005 \begin_inset Index idx
17008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17017 \begin_layout Standard
17018 This file type has the extension
17019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17035 Portable Document Format
17036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 was derived from PostScript.
17044 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17053 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17054 looks exactly the same.
17057 \begin_layout Standard
17058 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17062 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17066 (JPG, file extension
17067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17094 Portable Network Graphics
17095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17098 (PNG, file extension
17099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17111 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17112 converts them in the
17113 background to one of these formats.
17114 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17115 will slow down your workflow.
17116 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17119 \begin_layout Standard
17120 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17122 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17128 \begin_layout Description
17130 \begin_inset space ~
17133 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17137 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17140 \begin_layout Description
17142 \begin_inset space ~
17149 ) This uses the program
17151 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17154 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17157 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17160 is a new engine, derived from
17164 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17165 access (see section
17166 \begin_inset space ~
17170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17172 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17177 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17178 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17183 \begin_layout Description
17185 \begin_inset space ~
17192 ) This uses the program
17197 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17203 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17204 font access (see section
17205 \begin_inset space ~
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17211 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17216 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17217 vertically written Japanese.
17220 \begin_layout Description
17222 \begin_inset space ~
17225 (cropped) This is the same as
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17233 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17234 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17235 to generate good-looking
17236 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17239 \begin_layout Description
17241 \begin_inset space ~
17244 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17248 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17252 \begin_layout Description
17254 \begin_inset space ~
17257 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17261 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17262 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17266 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17267 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17270 \begin_layout Standard
17274 \begin_inset space ~
17283 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17284 works without problems.
17285 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17286 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17298 \begin_inset space ~
17303 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17313 \begin_inset Index idx
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17317 FileFormats ! XHTML
17323 \begin_inset Index idx
17326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17335 \begin_layout Standard
17336 This file type has the extension
17337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17349 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17350 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17351 When \SpecialChar LyX
17352 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17353 suitable for the purpose.
17354 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17360 between different formats, which are described in section
17362 Math Output in XHTML
17367 \begin_inset space ~
17375 \begin_layout Standard
17376 XHTML output remains
17377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17384 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17385 features are supported yet.
17389 and the World Wide Web
17393 Additional Features
17395 manual, for more information.
17398 \begin_layout Standard
17399 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17401 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17402 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17408 \begin_layout Subsection
17410 \begin_inset Index idx
17413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17422 \begin_layout Standard
17423 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17424 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17433 or use the toolbar button
17440 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17441 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17448 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17452 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17454 \begin_inset space ~
17458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17460 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17465 Further output formats can be selected via
17467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17468 View (Other Formats)
17470 or the toolbar button
17479 \begin_layout Standard
17480 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17481 viewer window using the menu
17483 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17489 Update (Other Formats)
17494 \begin_layout Standard
17495 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17498 To have a real output, export your document.
17501 \begin_layout Section
17502 A few Words about Typography
17503 \begin_inset Index idx
17506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17515 \begin_layout Subsection
17516 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17517 \begin_inset Index idx
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \begin_inset Index idx
17530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17539 \begin_layout Standard
17540 In \SpecialChar LyX
17542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17553 symbol comes in four variants: the
17570 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17576 \begin_layout Standard
17577 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17587 height_special "totalheight"
17592 backgroundcolor "none"
17595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17596 \begin_inset Tabular
17597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17598 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17600 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17601 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17602 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17671 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17694 system key combination
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17711 and the em dash with
17714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17727 is the Mac label for the right
17738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17751 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17774 system key combination or
17775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17841 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17847 \begin_layout Standard
17848 Dashes can also be inserted with
17850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17852 \begin_inset space ~
17855 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17864 and 2014 for the en dash).
17867 \begin_layout Standard
17868 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17869 mode and has a length of its own.
17870 Here are some examples:
17873 \begin_layout Enumerate
17874 line- and page-breaks
17875 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17885 \begin_layout Enumerate
17887 \begin_inset space ~
17891 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17901 \begin_layout Enumerate
17902 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17903 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17913 \begin_layout Enumerate
17914 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17918 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17928 \begin_layout Standard
17930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17932 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17933 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17941 \begin_layout Subsection
17942 Dashes and Line Breaks
17943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17945 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17952 \begin_layout Standard
17953 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17954 case and locale, e.
17955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17961 \begin_layout Itemize
17962 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17963 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17966 \begin_layout Itemize
17967 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17971 \begin_layout Itemize
17972 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17973 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17976 \begin_layout Standard
17977 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17978 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17989 allows line breaks after hyphens
17990 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17992 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
17995 en-dashes and em-dashes.
17998 \begin_layout Enumerate
17999 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18003 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18005 The Elements of Typographic Style
18008 \begin_inset space ~
18011 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18014 \begin_layout Enumerate
18015 Unwanted line breaks
18020 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18022 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18025 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18032 Prevent Hyphenation
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18053 in \SpecialChar TeX
18055 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18056 , a protected space does not suffice
18060 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18067 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18068 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18069 in the document language.
18070 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18084 \begin_layout Itemize
18086 \begin_inset space ~
18090 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18100 height_special "totalheight"
18105 backgroundcolor "none"
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 \begin_layout Itemize
18119 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18129 height_special "totalheight"
18134 backgroundcolor "none"
18137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18139 \begin_inset space ~
18147 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18148 \begin_inset space ~
18151 – sont très utiles.
18154 \begin_layout Itemize
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18172 \begin_layout Standard
18173 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18174 \begin_inset space ~
18177 – in contrast to an overfull line
18178 \begin_inset space ~
18181 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18185 \begin_layout Standard
18186 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18191 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18192 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18197 \begin_layout Enumerate
18198 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18199 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18200 or \SpecialChar TeX
18206 \begin_layout Itemize
18208 \begin_inset space ~
18211 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18212 \begin_inset space ~
18215 – sont très utiles.
18219 \begin_layout Enumerate
18220 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18221 \begin_inset Newline newline
18226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18227 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18228 Optional line break
18234 \begin_layout Itemize
18235 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18236 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18237 should be followed by
18238 a line break opportunity.
18241 \begin_layout Standard
18242 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18243 \begin_inset space ~
18247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18249 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18260 \begin_layout Enumerate
18261 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18262 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18263 or en dashes (see section
18264 \begin_inset space ~
18268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18270 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18281 Changes and backwards compatibility
18284 \begin_layout Standard
18285 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18287 \begin_inset space ~
18290 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18291 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18300 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18301 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18310 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18312 \begin_inset space ~
18315 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18317 prevents ligation to dashes.
18319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18326 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18331 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18332 after the input (unless the current text font is
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18341 The behavior was changed since
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18357 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18358 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18359 as non-breakable dashes.
18360 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18369 \begin_layout Standard
18372 \begin_inset space ~
18380 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18382 \begin_inset space ~
18385 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18390 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18391 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18393 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18397 If you used both literal and
18398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18405 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18407 \begin_inset space ~
18410 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18411 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18414 \begin_layout Subsection
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18428 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18435 \begin_layout Standard
18436 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18437 but automatically in the output.
18438 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18444 \begin_inset Index idx
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18454 following the rules of the document language.
18456 does not hyphenate text in the
18460 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18463 \begin_layout Standard
18465 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18469 font and with unusual constructs, like
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18478 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18479 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18480 This is done with the menu
18482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18483 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18485 \begin_inset space ~
18491 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18493 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18497 \begin_layout Standard
18498 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18499 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18510 would then see the hyphen
18511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 as a line break possibility.
18519 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18520 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18524 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18527 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18529 Prevent Hyphenation
18534 \begin_inset space ~
18542 \begin_layout Subsection
18544 \begin_inset Index idx
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18557 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18560 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18567 \begin_layout Standard
18568 When \SpecialChar LyX
18569 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18570 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18572 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18578 appropriate amount of space.
18579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18582 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18584 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18585 gets after another word.
18588 \begin_layout Standard
18589 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18590 not work in all cases.
18592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18603 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18604 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18607 \begin_layout Standard
18608 Here are some examples of
18612 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18615 \begin_layout Itemize
18620 \begin_layout Itemize
18625 \begin_layout Standard
18626 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18629 \begin_layout Itemize
18631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18635 this is too much space!
18638 \begin_layout Itemize
18643 \begin_layout Standard
18644 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18647 \begin_layout Standard
18648 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18651 \begin_layout Enumerate
18655 \begin_inset space ~
18660 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18661 \begin_inset space ~
18665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18667 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18672 \begin_inset Index idx
18675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 Spaces ! inter-word
18684 \begin_layout Enumerate
18688 \begin_inset space ~
18693 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18694 \begin_inset space ~
18698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18700 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18705 \begin_inset Index idx
18708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18717 \begin_layout Enumerate
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18729 \begin_inset space ~
18736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18738 \begin_inset space ~
18743 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18744 This function is also bound to
18747 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18753 \begin_layout Standard
18754 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18757 \begin_layout Itemize
18759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18763 \begin_inset space \space{}
18766 this is too much space!
18769 \begin_layout Itemize
18770 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18776 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18778 will take care of this.
18781 \begin_layout Standard
18782 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18786 \begin_inset space ~
18792 feature described in the section
18794 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18799 Additional Features
18804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18806 \begin_inset Index idx
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18810 Typography ! Quotation marks
18816 \begin_inset Index idx
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 Quotation marks | see
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 \begin_layout Standard
18852 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18853 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18854 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18864 The keyboard character,
18868 , generates this automatically.
18871 \begin_layout Standard
18872 You can specify what character the
18876 key produces by using the submenu
18882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18886 \begin_inset Index idx
18889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18890 Document ! Settings
18895 dialog and switching the
18899 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18900 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18902 \begin_inset space ~
18908 \begin_layout Labeling
18909 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18925 \begin_inset space ~
18929 \begin_inset Quotes els
18933 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18947 \begin_inset Quotes els
18951 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18954 quotation marks (as common, e.
18955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18961 \begin_layout Labeling
18962 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18965 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18969 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18973 \begin_inset space ~
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18981 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18985 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18991 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18995 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18999 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19003 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19006 quotation marks (as common, e.
19007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19013 \begin_layout Labeling
19014 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19017 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19021 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19025 \begin_inset space ~
19029 \begin_inset space ~
19033 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19037 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19043 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19051 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19055 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19058 quotation marks (as common, e.
19059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19065 \begin_layout Labeling
19066 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19069 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19077 \begin_inset space ~
19081 \begin_inset space ~
19085 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19089 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19103 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19107 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19110 quotation marks (as common, e.
19111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19117 \begin_layout Labeling
19118 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19121 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19125 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19129 \begin_inset space ~
19133 \begin_inset space ~
19137 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19141 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19147 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19151 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19155 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19159 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19162 quotation marks (as common, e.
19163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19166 g., in Switzerland)
19169 \begin_layout Labeling
19170 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19173 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19177 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19181 \begin_inset space ~
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19189 \begin_inset Quotes als
19193 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19199 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19203 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19207 \begin_inset Quotes als
19211 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19214 quotation marks (as common, e.
19215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19221 \begin_layout Labeling
19222 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19225 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19229 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19241 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19245 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19251 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19255 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19259 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19263 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19266 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19269 \begin_layout Labeling
19270 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19273 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19277 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_inset space ~
19289 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19293 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19299 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19303 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19307 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19311 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19314 quotation marks (as common, e.
19315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19318 g., in Great Britain)
19321 \begin_layout Labeling
19322 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19325 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19329 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19341 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19345 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19351 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19355 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19359 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19363 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19366 quotation marks (as common, e.
19367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19373 \begin_layout Labeling
19374 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19377 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19381 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19393 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19397 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19403 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19407 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19411 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19415 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19418 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19424 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19425 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19426 the inner marks differ).
19434 \begin_layout Labeling
19435 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19438 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19442 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19446 \begin_inset space ~
19450 \begin_inset space ~
19454 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19458 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19464 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19472 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19476 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19479 quotation marks (as common, e.
19480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19486 \begin_layout Labeling
19487 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19490 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19498 \begin_inset space ~
19502 \begin_inset space ~
19506 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19510 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19516 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19520 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19524 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19528 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19531 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19534 \begin_layout Labeling
19535 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19536 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19544 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19550 \begin_inset space ~
19554 \begin_inset space ~
19560 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19568 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19572 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19576 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19580 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19584 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19587 quotation marks (as common, e.
19588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19597 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19605 \begin_layout Labeling
19606 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19607 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19615 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19621 \begin_inset space ~
19625 \begin_inset space ~
19631 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19639 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19643 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19647 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19651 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19655 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19658 quotation marks (as common, e.
19659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19662 g., in North Korea and China)
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19668 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19676 \begin_layout Standard
19677 Inner quotation marks
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19683 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19684 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19692 does not necessarily mean
19693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19701 This is why we call them
19702 \begin_inset Quotes els
19706 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19722 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19724 \begin_inset Quotes els
19728 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19731 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19734 arg "quote-insert inner"
19739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19745 \begin_layout Standard
19746 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19747 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19748 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19749 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19750 If you check the setting
19752 Use dynamic quotation marks
19756 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19757 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19760 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19761 they appear in a special color).
19762 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19763 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19768 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19771 \begin_layout Standard
19772 Individual quotation marks (i.
19773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19776 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19777 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19781 \begin_layout Subsection
19783 \begin_inset Index idx
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 Typography ! Ligatures
19793 \begin_inset Index idx
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19827 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19834 \begin_layout Standard
19835 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19836 print them as single characters.
19837 These groups are known as
19842 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19843 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19845 Here are the standard ligatures:
19848 \begin_layout Itemize
19852 \begin_layout Itemize
19856 \begin_layout Itemize
19860 \begin_layout Itemize
19864 \begin_layout Itemize
19868 \begin_layout Standard
19869 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19872 \begin_layout Standard
19873 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19874 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19882 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19898 To break a ligature, use
19900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19901 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19903 \begin_inset space ~
19910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19921 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19938 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19946 \begin_layout Subsection
19948 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19950 \begin_inset Index idx
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 \begin_layout Standard
19966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19967 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19971 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19974 \begin_layout Description
19976 The name of the game.
19979 \begin_layout Description
19981 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19985 \begin_layout Description
19987 The \SpecialChar TeX
19988 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19992 \begin_layout Description
19993 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19994 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19998 \begin_layout Standard
19999 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20005 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20013 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20014 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20015 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20016 converges to the number
20017 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20020 : The actual version is
20021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20029 , the previous one was
20030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20041 \begin_layout Subsection
20043 \begin_inset Index idx
20046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 \begin_layout Standard
20056 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20057 space between two words.
20058 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20068 for units use the menu
20070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20071 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20073 \begin_inset space ~
20081 arg "space-insert thin"
20087 \begin_layout Standard
20088 Here is an example to show the differences:
20091 \begin_layout Standard
20092 \begin_inset Tabular
20093 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20094 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20095 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20096 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 \begin_inset space ~
20107 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 space between number and unit
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20135 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 half space between number and unit
20160 \begin_layout Subsection
20162 \begin_inset Index idx
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20166 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20174 \begin_layout Standard
20175 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20177 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20178 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20179 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20180 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20181 These bits of text became known as
20192 \begin_layout Standard
20193 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20194 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20195 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20196 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20197 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20198 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20199 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20200 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20201 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20202 \begin_inset Newline newline
20210 \begin_inset Newline newline
20218 \begin_inset Newline newline
20221 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20222 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20223 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20225 \begin_inset space ~
20229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20231 key "latexcompanion"
20237 \begin_inset space ~
20241 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20248 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20249 's page break mechanism.
20252 \begin_layout Chapter
20253 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20256 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20263 \begin_layout Standard
20264 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20267 \begin_inset space ~
20273 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20276 \begin_layout Section
20278 \begin_inset Index idx
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20297 \begin_layout Standard
20299 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20302 \begin_layout Description
20305 \begin_inset space ~
20308 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20309 \begin_inset Newline newline
20313 \begin_inset Note Note
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20325 \begin_layout Description
20326 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20327 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20328 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20331 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20332 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20334 \begin_inset space ~
20340 \begin_inset Newline newline
20344 \begin_inset Note Comment
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20357 \begin_layout Description
20359 \begin_inset space ~
20362 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20363 set in the document settings under
20365 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20367 \begin_inset space ~
20373 \begin_inset Newline newline
20377 \begin_inset Newline newline
20381 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20391 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20396 of a comment that appears in the output.
20402 \begin_inset Newline newline
20406 \begin_inset Newline newline
20409 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20412 \begin_layout Standard
20413 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20425 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20428 \begin_layout Section
20430 \begin_inset Index idx
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20442 name "sec:Footnotes"
20449 \begin_layout Standard
20451 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20457 or the toolbar button
20460 arg "footnote-insert"
20472 \begin_inset Graphics
20473 filename clipart/footnote.png
20482 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20483 's representation of your footnote.
20493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20512 label, the box will
20516 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20517 Clicking on the box label again will close
20530 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20531 and click on the footnote
20546 \begin_layout Standard
20547 Here is an example footnote:
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20564 \begin_layout Standard
20565 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20566 position where the footnote box is placed.
20567 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20568 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20569 according to the document class.
20571 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20572 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20578 ey are described in the
20581 \begin_inset space ~
20589 \begin_layout Section
20591 \begin_inset Index idx
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20603 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20610 \begin_layout Standard
20611 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20613 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20617 \begin_inset space ~
20622 or the toolbar button
20625 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20651 appearing within your text.
20652 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20653 's representation of your margin
20662 \begin_layout Standard
20663 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20667 \begin_inset Marginal
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 This is a marginal note.
20680 \begin_layout Standard
20681 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20682 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20683 pages, right on odd pages.
20686 \begin_layout Standard
20687 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20690 \begin_inset space ~
20698 \begin_inset space ~
20706 \begin_layout Section
20707 Graphics and Images
20708 \begin_inset Index idx
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 \begin_inset Index idx
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20730 name "sec:Graphics"
20737 \begin_layout Standard
20738 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20739 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20742 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20751 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20754 \begin_layout Standard
20755 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20760 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20761 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20763 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20764 \begin_inset space ~
20768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20770 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20777 \begin_layout Standard
20782 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20783 of the image in the output.
20784 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20788 \begin_inset space ~
20792 \begin_inset space ~
20801 \begin_inset space ~
20805 \begin_inset space ~
20809 \begin_inset space ~
20814 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20815 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20823 \begin_layout Standard
20827 \begin_inset space ~
20831 \begin_inset space ~
20836 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20837 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20839 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20844 \begin_inset space ~
20849 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20850 with the image size is printed.
20853 \begin_layout Standard
20854 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20855 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20857 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20860 \begin_layout Standard
20862 \begin_inset Graphics
20863 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20871 \begin_layout Standard
20872 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20873 the image into a float, see section
20874 \begin_inset space ~
20878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20880 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20887 \begin_layout Subsection
20889 \begin_inset Index idx
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20901 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20908 \begin_layout Standard
20909 You can insert images in any known file format.
20910 But as we explained in section
20911 \begin_inset space ~
20915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20917 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20921 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20923 therefore uses the program
20927 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20928 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20929 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20930 \begin_inset space ~
20934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20936 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20943 \begin_layout Standard
20944 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20947 \begin_layout Description
20949 \begin_inset space ~
20952 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20953 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20954 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20958 Graphics Interchange Format
20959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20962 (GIF, file extension
20963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20975 \begin_inset Index idx
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21010 Portable Network Graphics
21011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21014 (PNG, file extension
21015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21027 \begin_inset Index idx
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21062 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21066 (JPG, file extension
21067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21091 \begin_inset Index idx
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 \begin_layout Description
21127 \begin_inset space ~
21130 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21132 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21133 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21134 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21135 \begin_inset Newline newline
21138 Scalable image formats can be
21139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21142 Scalable Vector Graphics
21143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21146 (SVG, file extension
21147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21159 \begin_inset Index idx
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21194 Encapsulated PostScript
21195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21198 (EPS, file extension
21199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21211 \begin_inset Index idx
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21246 Portable Document Format
21247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21250 (PDF, file extension
21251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21263 \begin_inset Index idx
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21281 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21282 result will not be scalable.
21283 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21297 \begin_layout Standard
21298 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21305 \begin_layout Subsection
21306 Grouping of Image Settings
21307 \begin_inset Index idx
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21311 Images ! Settings grouping
21319 \begin_layout Standard
21320 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21322 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21323 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21325 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21326 need to manually change each of them.
21330 \begin_layout Standard
21331 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21334 \begin_inset space ~
21338 \begin_inset space ~
21350 \begin_inset space ~
21354 \begin_inset space ~
21360 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21361 and checking the name of the desired group.
21364 \begin_layout Section
21366 \begin_inset Index idx
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21385 \begin_layout Standard
21386 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21389 arg "tabular-insert"
21394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21398 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21399 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21400 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21403 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21404 from the rest of the table.
21405 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21406 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21408 Here is an example table:
21411 \begin_layout Standard
21413 \begin_inset Tabular
21414 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21415 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21621 \begin_layout Standard
21623 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21624 This corresponds to the
21625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21632 table style listed in the style selection.
21635 \begin_layout Standard
21637 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21638 Other available styles include:
21641 \begin_layout Itemize
21643 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21652 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21656 \begin_layout Itemize
21658 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21659 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21662 \begin_layout Itemize
21664 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21673 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21674 bold top/bottom lines (see
21685 \begin_layout Standard
21687 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21688 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21689 button can be changed in
21691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21696 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21700 \begin_layout Subsection
21704 \begin_layout Standard
21705 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21708 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21712 This brings up the table dialog.
21713 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21714 cursor is placed currently.
21715 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21716 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21717 done on all of your selection.
21720 \begin_layout Standard
21721 In addition to the table dialog, the
21724 \begin_inset space ~
21729 helps you in setting table properties.
21730 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21733 \begin_layout Standard
21737 \begin_inset space ~
21742 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21743 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21744 current cell respectively.
21745 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21747 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21748 of text, see section
21749 \begin_inset space ~
21753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21755 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21762 \begin_layout Standard
21763 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21764 using the check box
21773 This will merge the cells to
21777 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21778 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21779 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21780 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21781 in the last row without the upper border:
21784 \begin_layout Standard
21786 \begin_inset Tabular
21787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21788 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21789 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21790 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21791 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21792 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21812 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 \begin_layout Standard
21924 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21925 -arguments for the table.
21926 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21927 explained in the chapter
21934 \begin_inset space ~
21940 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21941 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21942 but are visible in the output.
21945 \begin_layout Standard
21946 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 Most DVI-viewers are
21958 able to display rotations.
21966 \begin_layout Standard
21971 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21976 adds lines for all cell borders.
21979 \begin_layout Subsection
21981 \begin_inset Index idx
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 Tables ! Multi-page
21991 \begin_inset Index idx
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 \begin_layout Standard
22004 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22007 \begin_inset space ~
22011 \begin_inset space ~
22019 \begin_inset space ~
22024 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22025 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22028 \begin_layout Description
22033 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22034 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22035 Except for the first page, if
22038 \begin_inset space ~
22046 \begin_layout Description
22050 \begin_inset space ~
22055 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22056 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22059 \begin_layout Description
22064 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22065 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22066 except for the last page, if
22069 \begin_inset space ~
22077 \begin_layout Description
22081 \begin_inset space ~
22086 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22087 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22090 \begin_layout Description
22091 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22092 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22098 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22101 \begin_inset space ~
22109 \begin_layout Standard
22110 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22111 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22112 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22118 In this context, first means first in this order:
22121 \begin_inset space ~
22133 \begin_inset space ~
22138 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22141 \begin_layout Standard
22143 \begin_inset Tabular
22144 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22145 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22146 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22147 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22148 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22149 <row endfirsthead="true">
22150 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22161 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 <row endfirsthead="true">
22181 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22192 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <row endhead="true">
22214 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <row endhead="true">
22245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 <row endfoot="true">
22278 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23270 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23279 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <row endlastfoot="true">
24260 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 \begin_layout Subsection
24299 \begin_inset Index idx
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24311 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24318 \begin_layout Standard
24319 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24320 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24321 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24322 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24326 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24329 \begin_layout Standard
24330 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24331 for the column in the table dialog.
24332 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24333 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24337 \begin_layout Standard
24339 \begin_inset Tabular
24340 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24341 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24343 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24344 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24364 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24489 This is longer now.
24494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24546 This is longer now.
24551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24577 \begin_layout Standard
24578 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24579 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24585 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24591 Selection with the mouse or with
24595 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24596 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24597 the selection from outside the table.
24600 \begin_layout Section
24602 \begin_inset Index idx
24605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24621 \begin_layout Subsection
24625 \begin_layout Standard
24626 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24627 have a fixed location.
24629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24636 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24644 \begin_inset space ~
24649 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24650 too many notes on the current page.
24653 \begin_layout Standard
24654 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24655 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24656 and pages without text.
24657 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24658 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24659 Floats are therefore numbered.
24660 Referencing is described in section
24661 \begin_inset space ~
24665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24667 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24674 \begin_layout Standard
24675 To insert a float, use the menu
24677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24681 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24682 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24684 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24685 \begin_inset Index idx
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24694 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24695 paragraph within the float.
24696 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24697 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24698 left-clicking on the box label.
24699 A closed float box looks like this:
24700 \begin_inset Graphics
24701 filename clipart/float.png
24706 – a gray button with a red label.
24709 \begin_layout Standard
24710 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24712 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24715 \begin_layout Subsection
24717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24719 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24724 \begin_inset Index idx
24727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24728 Floats ! Figure floats
24736 \begin_layout Standard
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24744 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24748 was created using the menu
24750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24751 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24757 arg "float-insert figure"
24761 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24770 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24774 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24775 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24779 \begin_inset space ~
24787 arg "layout-paragraph"
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24794 \begin_inset Float figure
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset Graphics
24804 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24819 name "fig:A-star-in"
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24838 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 ) and refer to it using the menu
24851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24857 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24861 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24862 vague references like
24863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24870 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24871 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24881 For more about cross-references, see section
24882 \begin_inset space ~
24886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24888 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24895 \begin_layout Standard
24896 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24897 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24898 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24899 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24900 as described in section
24901 \begin_inset space ~
24905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24907 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24913 \begin_inset space ~
24917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24919 reference "fig:Two-images"
24923 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24924 You can also set the images one below the other.
24926 \begin_inset space ~
24930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24932 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24939 reference "fig:Star"
24943 are the subfigures.
24946 \begin_layout Standard
24947 \begin_inset Float figure
24954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24955 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24959 \begin_inset Float figure
24966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24972 name "fig:Undefinable"
24984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24985 \begin_inset Graphics
24986 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24998 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25002 \begin_inset Float figure
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25010 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 \begin_inset Graphics
25029 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25041 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25048 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25053 name "fig:Two-images"
25070 \begin_layout Subsection
25072 \begin_inset Index idx
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25076 Floats ! Table floats
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25085 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25088 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25091 or the toolbar button
25094 arg "float-insert table"
25098 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25099 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25100 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25102 \begin_inset space ~
25106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25108 reference "tab:Table-float"
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 \begin_inset Float table
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25129 name "tab:Table-float"
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 \begin_inset Tabular
25144 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25145 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25147 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25148 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25299 \end{array}\right]$
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25341 \begin_layout Subsection
25343 \begin_inset Index idx
25346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25355 \begin_layout Standard
25357 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25358 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25359 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25361 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25369 \begin_inset space ~
25377 \begin_layout Section
25379 \begin_inset Index idx
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 \begin_layout Standard
25393 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25395 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25396 \begin_inset space \space{}
25403 \begin_layout Standard
25404 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25405 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25411 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25412 and its alignment within the page.
25415 \begin_layout Standard
25417 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25427 height_special "totalheight"
25432 backgroundcolor "none"
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 This is a minipage.
25439 The text is set in an italic style.
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25445 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25446 another formatting.
25454 \begin_layout Standard
25455 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25458 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25462 as described in section
25463 \begin_inset space ~
25467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25469 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25474 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25481 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25491 height_special "totalheight"
25496 backgroundcolor "none"
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25501 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25507 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25511 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25521 height_special "totalheight"
25526 backgroundcolor "none"
25529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25530 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25531 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25539 \begin_layout Standard
25540 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25546 \begin_layout Standard
25547 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25549 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25556 \begin_inset space ~
25564 \begin_layout Chapter
25565 Mathematical Formulas
25566 \begin_inset Index idx
25569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 \begin_inset Index idx
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25610 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25617 \begin_layout Standard
25618 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25623 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25626 \begin_layout Section
25628 \begin_inset Index idx
25631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25640 \begin_layout Standard
25641 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25654 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25656 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25657 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25658 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25671 \begin_inset space ~
25676 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25681 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25684 \begin_layout Standard
25685 This is a line with an inline formula
25686 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25693 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25694 paragraph, like this one:
25695 \begin_inset Formula
25702 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25707 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25709 For example, typing
25710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25723 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25724 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25728 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25731 \begin_inset space ~
25739 \begin_layout Subsection
25740 Navigating in Formulas
25741 \begin_inset Index idx
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25753 \begin_layout Standard
25754 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25755 achieved with the arrow keys.
25757 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25758 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25763 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25764 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25768 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25772 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25775 \end{array}\right]$
25783 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25788 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25789 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25792 \begin_layout Standard
25797 , printed in this document as
25798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25802 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25809 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25810 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25811 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25816 For example, if you want
25817 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25825 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25835 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25839 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25844 , since in the latter case only the
25847 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25852 will be under the square root sign:
25853 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25859 \begin_layout Standard
25860 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25862 \begin_inset Formula
25864 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25873 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25874 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25877 \begin_layout Subsection
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25883 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25887 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25888 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25889 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25890 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25891 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25895 \begin_layout Subsection
25896 Exponents and Subscripts
25897 \begin_inset Index idx
25900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25907 \begin_inset Index idx
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25919 \begin_layout Standard
25920 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25923 arg "math-superscript"
25929 arg "math-subscript"
25932 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25934 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25937 , type in a formula
25940 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25950 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25956 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25960 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25966 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25972 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25981 , you have to use an extra
25985 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25986 For example, if you want
25987 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25993 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25999 Subscripts are similar: To get
26000 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26006 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26014 \begin_layout Subsection
26016 \begin_inset Index idx
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26028 \begin_layout Standard
26029 Create a fraction either with the command
26035 or by using the icon
26038 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26044 \begin_inset space ~
26050 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26051 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26052 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26057 To move back up, press
26062 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26063 \begin_inset Formula
26065 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26068 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26076 \begin_layout Subsection
26078 \begin_inset Index idx
26081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26090 \begin_layout Standard
26091 Roots can be created using the
26094 \begin_inset space ~
26102 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26108 arg "math-insert \\root"
26130 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26136 always produces a square root.
26139 \begin_layout Subsection
26140 Operators with Limits
26141 \begin_inset Index idx
26144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26151 \begin_inset Index idx
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26163 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26170 \begin_layout Standard
26172 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26176 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26179 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26180 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26181 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26182 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26183 The sum operator will automatically place its
26184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26191 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26193 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26197 \begin_inset Formula
26199 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26204 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26208 \begin_layout Standard
26209 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26211 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26212 behind the operator and using the menu
26214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26215 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26217 \begin_inset space ~
26221 \begin_inset space ~
26235 \begin_layout Standard
26236 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26245 \begin_inset Index idx
26248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26255 \begin_inset Formula
26257 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26262 which will place the
26263 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26275 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26276 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26283 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26290 Have a look at section
26291 \begin_inset space ~
26295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26297 reference "subsec:Functions"
26301 for an explanation of function macros.
26304 \begin_layout Subsection
26306 \begin_inset Index idx
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_layout Standard
26319 Most math symbols can be found in the
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26327 under one of several categories; including
26344 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26350 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26351 don't have to use the
26354 \begin_inset space ~
26359 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26361 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26364 \begin_layout Subsection
26366 \begin_inset Index idx
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26378 \begin_layout Standard
26379 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26385 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26399 arg "math-insert \\space"
26403 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26404 For example, the sequence
26409 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26412 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26414 \begin_inset Graphics
26415 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26420 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26421 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26422 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26423 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26424 , because they are negative
26426 Here are two examples:
26429 \begin_layout Standard
26439 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26445 \begin_layout Standard
26455 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26461 \begin_layout Subsection
26463 \begin_inset Index idx
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26475 name "subsec:Functions"
26482 \begin_layout Standard
26486 \begin_inset space ~
26491 contains under the button
26494 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26497 a number of function macros, such as
26498 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26502 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26510 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26517 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26518 avoid confusions, because
26519 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26523 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26529 \begin_layout Standard
26530 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26532 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26536 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26542 \begin_layout Standard
26543 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26544 are placed, as described in section
26545 \begin_inset space ~
26549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26551 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26558 \begin_layout Subsection
26560 \begin_inset Index idx
26563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_layout Standard
26573 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26575 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26576 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26577 commands, for example, to enter
26578 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26581 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26582 Our example is entered by typing
26587 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26594 \begin_inset space ~
26598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26600 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26604 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 \begin_inset Float table
26615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26621 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26625 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26635 \begin_inset Tabular
26636 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26637 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26639 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26778 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26832 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26940 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27048 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27201 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27222 \begin_layout Standard
27223 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27226 \begin_inset space ~
27234 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27237 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27241 \begin_layout Section
27242 Brackets and Delimiters
27243 \begin_inset Index idx
27246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 \begin_inset Index idx
27256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27265 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27272 \begin_layout Standard
27273 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27275 For some purposes, using just the keys
27280 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27281 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27282 toolbar delimiter icon
27285 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27289 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27290 \begin_inset Formula
27292 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27300 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27301 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27305 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27308 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27314 \begin_inset Formula
27316 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27324 \begin_layout Standard
27325 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27326 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27330 \begin_layout Standard
27331 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27332 left side and right side.
27333 If you use the option
27336 \begin_inset space ~
27341 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27342 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27344 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27349 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27350 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27355 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27356 is to go inside the brackets.
27357 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27362 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27363 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27364 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27368 arg "math-delim ( )"
27374 \begin_layout Section
27375 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27376 \begin_inset Index idx
27379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27386 \begin_inset Index idx
27389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27396 \begin_inset Index idx
27399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27400 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27408 \begin_layout Standard
27409 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27413 \begin_inset space ~
27421 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27425 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27426 Here is an example:
27427 \begin_inset Formula
27429 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27438 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27439 \begin_inset space ~
27443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27445 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27450 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27451 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27452 This alignment is set in the box
27457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27506 for every column as default.
27507 For example, the sequence
27508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27519 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27520 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27521 corresponds to the relevant column.
27522 The result will look like this:
27523 \begin_inset Formula
27526 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27527 column & has & has\,right\\
27528 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27537 \begin_layout Standard
27538 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27541 arg "newline-insert newline"
27544 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27545 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27547 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27550 or the math toolbar.
27553 \begin_layout Standard
27554 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27555 It can be created with the menu
27557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27558 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27560 \begin_inset space ~
27572 Here is an example:
27573 \begin_inset Formula
27587 \begin_layout Standard
27588 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27591 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27594 arg "newline-insert newline"
27598 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27603 arg "newline-insert newline"
27606 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27614 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27615 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27616 A new row is created by every further entry of
27619 arg "newline-insert newline"
27623 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27624 Here is an example:
27625 \begin_inset Formula
27627 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27628 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27633 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27634 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27635 \begin_inset Formula
27637 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27645 \begin_layout Standard
27646 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27653 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27654 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27657 reference "eq:asquared"
27662 The other types are described in section
27663 \begin_inset space ~
27667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27669 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27676 \begin_layout Section
27677 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27678 \begin_inset Index idx
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27682 Math ! Formula numbering
27688 \begin_inset Index idx
27691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27692 Math ! Referencing formulas
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27700 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27708 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27711 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27713 \begin_inset space ~
27717 \begin_inset space ~
27725 arg "math-number-toggle"
27729 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27730 within parentheses.
27731 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27732 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27733 the document class.
27734 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27735 separated by a dot:
27736 \begin_inset Formula
27746 arg "math-number-toggle"
27749 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27750 You can only number displayed formulas.
27753 \begin_layout Standard
27754 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27757 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27759 \begin_inset space ~
27763 \begin_inset space ~
27771 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27774 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27775 \begin_inset Formula
27778 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27784 To number all lines use the shortcut
27787 arg "math-number-toggle"
27793 \begin_layout Standard
27794 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27797 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27798 A label is inserted with the menu
27800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27809 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27810 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27811 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27823 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27824 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27825 We inserted in the following example the label
27826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27833 in the second line:
27834 \begin_inset Formula
27836 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27837 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27842 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27843 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27844 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27856 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27860 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27861 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27862 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27863 as the formula number:
27866 \begin_layout Standard
27867 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27870 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27877 \begin_layout Standard
27878 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27879 's cross-reference box are described in section
27880 \begin_inset space ~
27884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27886 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27891 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27899 \begin_layout Section
27900 User defined math macros
27901 \begin_inset Index idx
27904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27915 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27916 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27917 Math macros are explained in section
27920 \begin_inset space ~
27932 \begin_layout Section
27936 \begin_layout Subsection
27938 \begin_inset Index idx
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27950 \begin_layout Standard
27951 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27952 To set a font in a formula, use the
27955 \begin_inset space ~
27963 arg "math-insert \\font"
27966 , or enter its command, listed in table
27967 \begin_inset space ~
27971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27973 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 \begin_inset Float table
27988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27989 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27994 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27998 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28008 \begin_inset Tabular
28009 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28010 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28012 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28044 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28131 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28158 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28185 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28219 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28280 \begin_layout Standard
28281 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28289 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28307 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28312 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28313 space when you need a space in the box.
28314 Here is an example where
28315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28326 denotes the set of numbers:
28327 \begin_inset Formula
28329 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28337 \begin_layout Standard
28338 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28339 You can, for example, put a character in
28348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28352 \begin_inset Newline newline
28355 So it is better not to use this feature.
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28360 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28364 \begin_inset Newline newline
28367 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28373 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28374 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28380 \begin_layout Standard
28387 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28390 \begin_layout Standard
28391 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28393 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28394 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28396 \begin_inset space ~
28404 \begin_layout Subsection
28406 \begin_inset Index idx
28409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 \begin_layout Standard
28419 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28421 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28425 \begin_inset space ~
28429 \begin_inset space ~
28437 \begin_inset space ~
28445 arg "math-insert \\font"
28449 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28450 in black instead of blue.
28451 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28452 Here is an example:
28453 \begin_inset Formula
28456 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28457 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28466 \begin_layout Subsection
28468 \begin_inset Index idx
28471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28480 \begin_layout Standard
28481 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28482 automatically chosen in most situations.
28500 For most characters,
28508 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28509 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28514 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28515 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28516 thinks are appropriate.
28517 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28520 arg "math-insert \\style"
28524 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28525 For example, you can set
28526 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28529 , which is normally in
28538 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28542 The four styles are used in the following example:
28545 \begin_layout Standard
28546 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28550 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28554 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28558 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28564 \begin_layout Standard
28565 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28566 is set in a particular size with the menu
28568 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28570 \begin_inset space ~
28575 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28576 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28577 will be adjusted to correspond.
28578 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28589 \begin_layout Standard
28593 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28599 \begin_layout Section
28600 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28602 \begin_inset Index idx
28605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28612 \begin_inset Index idx
28615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28624 \begin_layout Standard
28626 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28627 that are in common use.
28630 \begin_layout Subsection
28631 Enabling AMS-Support
28634 \begin_layout Standard
28635 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28636 the document by selecting the checkbox
28639 \begin_inset space ~
28643 \begin_inset space ~
28647 \begin_inset space ~
28654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28658 \begin_inset Index idx
28661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 Document ! Settings
28670 \begin_inset space ~
28676 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28677 -errors in formulas,
28678 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28681 \begin_layout Subsection
28683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28685 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28690 \begin_inset Index idx
28693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28694 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28702 \begin_layout Standard
28703 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28704 provides a selection of different formula types.
28706 allows you to choose between
28727 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28728 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28735 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28738 \begin_layout Chapter
28742 \begin_layout Section
28744 \begin_inset Index idx
28747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28756 name "sec:Cross-References"
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28764 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28765 's strengths is cross-references.
28766 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28768 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28769 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28770 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28773 \begin_layout Enumerate
28777 \begin_layout Enumerate
28778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28780 name "enu:Second-item"
28787 \begin_layout Enumerate
28791 \begin_layout Standard
28792 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28797 or by pressing the toolbar button
28804 A gray label box like this:
28805 \begin_inset Graphics
28806 filename clipart/label.png
28810 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28812 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28848 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28864 \begin_layout Standard
28865 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28870 or the toolbar button
28873 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28877 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28878 \begin_inset Graphics
28879 filename clipart/reference.png
28883 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28885 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28898 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28902 \begin_layout Standard
28903 As an alternative to
28905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28908 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28913 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28914 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28916 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28930 \begin_inset space ~
28934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28936 reference "enu:Second-item"
28943 \begin_layout Standard
28944 It is recommended to use a protected space
28948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28949 described in section
28950 \begin_inset space ~
28954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28956 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28965 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28966 line breaks between them.
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28970 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28973 \begin_layout Description
28974 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28977 reference "fig:Two-images"
28984 \begin_layout Description
28985 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28986 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28998 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29005 \begin_layout Description
29006 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29007 \begin_inset space ~
29011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29012 LatexCommand pageref
29013 reference "fig:Two-images"
29020 \begin_layout Description
29022 \begin_inset space ~
29026 \begin_inset space ~
29029 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29031 LatexCommand vpageref
29032 reference "fig:Two-images"
29037 \begin_inset Newline newline
29040 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29041 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29042 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29043 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29044 it prints “on the next page”.
29045 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29048 \begin_layout Description
29050 \begin_inset space ~
29054 \begin_inset space ~
29058 \begin_inset space ~
29061 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29064 reference "fig:Two-images"
29069 \begin_inset Newline newline
29072 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29078 ; otherwise it behaves like
29082 \begin_inset space ~
29086 \begin_inset space ~
29095 \begin_layout Description
29097 \begin_inset space ~
29100 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29101 \begin_inset Newline newline
29105 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29113 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29123 \begin_inset Index idx
29126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29128 packages ! prettyref
29134 \begin_inset Index idx
29137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29139 packages ! refstyle
29150 \begin_inset Newline newline
29153 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29154 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29157 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29162 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29170 is the default and preferred because
29174 supports only English documents.
29175 The format is specified by using the command
29187 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29188 preamble of the document.
29189 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29207 \begin_inset Newline newline
29214 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29219 \begin_inset Newline newline
29230 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29231 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29233 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29234 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29239 , you might do so as follows:
29240 \begin_inset Newline newline
29247 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29252 \begin_inset Newline newline
29255 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29256 the package documentation
29257 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29259 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29265 \begin_inset Newline newline
29276 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29283 \begin_layout Description
29285 \begin_inset space ~
29288 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29290 LatexCommand nameref
29291 reference "fig:Two-images"
29298 \begin_layout Description
29300 \begin_inset space ~
29303 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29304 label for the reference:
29305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29306 LatexCommand labelonly
29307 reference "fig:Two-images"
29312 \begin_inset Newline newline
29315 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29316 Code, if you want to issue a command
29317 that \SpecialChar LyX
29323 , then you may want to use the
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29331 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29341 This is the form needed for e.
29342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29346 \begin_inset space \space{}
29353 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29354 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29356 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29360 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29364 \begin_layout Standard
29365 You can only use the style
29369 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29373 is always possible.
29376 \begin_layout Standard
29377 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29378 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29380 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29381 \begin_inset space ~
29385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29387 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29394 \begin_layout Standard
29395 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29399 \begin_inset space ~
29403 \begin_inset space ~
29408 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29409 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29412 \begin_inset space ~
29417 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29418 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29421 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29427 \begin_layout Standard
29428 You can change labels at any time.
29429 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29430 do not need to think about this.
29433 \begin_layout Standard
29434 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29436 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29441 References are described in detail in the section
29442 \begin_inset space ~
29452 \begin_inset space ~
29460 \begin_layout Section
29461 Table of Contents and other Listings
29462 \begin_inset Index idx
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29472 \begin_inset Index idx
29475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29476 Navigating ! Outline
29482 \begin_inset Index idx
29485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29501 \begin_layout Subsection
29503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29505 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29512 \begin_layout Standard
29513 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29516 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29518 \begin_inset space ~
29522 \begin_inset space ~
29528 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29530 If you click on it, the
29534 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29535 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29536 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29538 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29540 \begin_inset space ~
29545 that is described in section
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29552 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29560 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29561 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29563 \begin_inset space ~
29567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29569 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29573 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29581 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29585 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29587 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29590 \begin_layout Subsection
29591 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29594 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29601 \begin_layout Standard
29602 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29604 You can insert them via the
29606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29607 List/Contents/References
29610 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29613 \begin_layout Section
29614 URLs and Hyperlinks
29615 \begin_inset Index idx
29618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29625 \begin_inset Index idx
29628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29637 \begin_layout Subsection
29639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29648 \begin_layout Standard
29649 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29651 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29657 \begin_layout Standard
29658 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29660 \begin_inset Flex URL
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29665 https://www.lyx.org
29673 \begin_layout Standard
29674 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29680 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29693 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29702 \begin_layout Subsection
29704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29706 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29714 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29719 or with the toolbar button
29726 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29735 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29736 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29737 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29739 name "LyX's homepage"
29740 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29745 , an Email address like this:
29746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29748 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29749 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29755 , or a link to a file.
29760 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29768 \begin_layout Standard
29769 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29782 to the link target.
29785 \begin_layout Standard
29786 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29787 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29788 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29789 the text style dialog.
29790 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29794 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29796 name "LyX's homepage"
29797 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29805 \begin_layout Standard
29806 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29810 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29813 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29817 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29819 \begin_inset Newline newline
29827 \begin_inset Newline newline
29834 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29837 \begin_layout Section
29839 \begin_inset Index idx
29842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29851 name "sec:Appendices"
29858 \begin_layout Standard
29859 Appendices are created with the menu
29861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29863 \begin_inset space ~
29867 \begin_inset space ~
29873 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29874 as the appendix part of the book.
29875 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29878 \begin_layout Standard
29879 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29880 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29881 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29882 and the subsection number.
29883 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29887 \begin_layout Standard
29889 \begin_inset space ~
29893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29895 reference "chap:Credits"
29900 \begin_inset space ~
29904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29906 reference "subsec:Export"
29913 \begin_layout Section
29915 \begin_inset Index idx
29918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29927 name "sec:Bibliography"
29934 \begin_layout Standard
29935 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29937 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29938 \begin_inset space ~
29942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29944 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29951 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29956 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29957 \begin_inset space ~
29961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29963 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29968 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29969 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29970 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29974 using a bibliography database.
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29979 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29983 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29984 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29985 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29986 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29987 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29990 \begin_layout Subsection
29991 The Bibliography Environment
29992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29994 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30001 \begin_layout Standard
30006 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30008 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30017 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30019 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30020 of ASCII characters only.
30024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30026 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30029 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30035 \begin_inset Newline newline
30039 \begin_inset Flex URL
30042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30044 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30054 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30064 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30065 \begin_inset Newline newline
30072 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30073 the number of the entry.
30078 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30088 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30093 or the toolbar button
30096 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30100 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30101 containing the available citations.
30102 Select one or more keys from the list and
30112 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30113 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30117 \begin_layout Standard
30118 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30119 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30120 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30136 Companion Second Edition
30139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30141 key "latexcompanion"
30149 \begin_layout Standard
30150 The \SpecialChar LyX
30151 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30152 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30163 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30170 \begin_inset Index idx
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30182 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30183 the label needs to be given the form
30184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30195 Author A and Author B(Year)
30196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30203 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30210 \begin_inset space ~
30215 in the document settings
30216 \begin_inset Index idx
30219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30220 Document ! Settings
30227 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30229 \begin_inset space ~
30235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30237 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30245 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30247 Once you have done that, the
30251 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30268 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30269 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30270 These two are madatory.
30271 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30274 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30276 ) and in abrreviated form (
30283 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30284 add the abbreviated form to
30288 and the full list to the optional
30296 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30297 If specified like this,
30299 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30300 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30310 is specified, toggling
30311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30318 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30319 full and abbreviated list
30323 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30324 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30325 the citation references.
30326 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30332 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30335 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30337 \begin_inset space ~
30345 arg "layout-paragraph"
30349 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30352 \begin_layout Subsection
30353 Bibliography databases
30354 \begin_inset Index idx
30357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 Bibliography ! Databases
30364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30366 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30373 \begin_layout Standard
30374 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30382 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30383 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30388 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30390 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30391 your working field in a database.
30392 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30393 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30394 list for that document.
30395 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30399 \begin_layout Standard
30400 The database is a text file with the file extension
30401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30412 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30413 The format is explained in
30414 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30421 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30425 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30431 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30432 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30433 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30435 \begin_inset Flex URL
30438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30440 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30448 \begin_layout Standard
30450 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30451 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30452 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30454 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30456 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30457 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30458 Those are addressed by
30463 \begin_inset Index idx
30466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30468 packages ! biblatex
30474 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30475 (although it has been significantly
30476 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30486 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30487 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30488 might conversely fail to correctly
30489 handle databases that use specific
30498 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30508 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30510 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30514 \begin_inset Index idx
30517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30518 Document ! Settings
30530 \begin_inset space ~
30535 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30544 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30546 \begin_inset Index idx
30549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30564 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30566 \begin_inset space ~
30572 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30573 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30581 Add bibliography to TOC
30583 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30588 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30589 in the document or just the cited references.
30591 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30596 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30597 differ from the encoding of the document.
30602 \begin_layout Standard
30603 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30604 style file is a text file with the file extension
30605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30616 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30617 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30618 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30619 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30621 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30627 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30628 \begin_inset Newline newline
30632 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30634 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30644 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30649 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30654 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30659 \begin_inset Index idx
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30669 \begin_inset Index idx
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30674 packages ! biblatex
30682 \begin_layout Standard
30683 Accessing a database via
30687 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30691 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30693 \begin_inset space ~
30699 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30700 you cannot select a
30705 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30709 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30712 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30713 As for the styles, note the following.
30718 \begin_layout Standard
30723 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30736 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30737 file (text file with the file extension
30738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30749 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30750 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30752 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30756 \begin_layout Standard
30761 styles are not set in the
30764 \begin_inset space ~
30769 dialog, but in the document settings.
30770 \begin_inset Index idx
30773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30774 Document ! Settings
30779 However, in the dialog in the
30783 field, which is only visible if you use
30787 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30788 example how its heading will appear).
30789 These options are described in detail in the
30794 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30805 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30806 \begin_inset space ~
30810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30812 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30823 Bibliography Processors
30826 \begin_layout Standard
30827 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30828 uses a bibliography processor,
30829 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30830 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30831 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30833 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30834 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30840 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30841 You can do this on a general level in
30843 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30844 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30845 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30848 or for individual documents in
30850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30851 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30855 The following variants are available by default:
30858 \begin_layout Description
30859 biber a specific, modern processor
30860 \begin_inset Index idx
30863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 developed exclusively for
30874 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30880 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30885 makes use of; if you use the
30889 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30896 \begin_layout Description
30897 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30898 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30899 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30903 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30906 \begin_layout Description
30907 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30908 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30912 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30916 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30920 features are supported.
30923 \begin_layout Standard
30924 By default (with the
30930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30931 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30944 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30945 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30946 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30949 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30950 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30963 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30964 -based bibliography styles).
30965 This should suit most needs.
30968 \begin_layout Standard
30969 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30970 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30971 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30976 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30977 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30978 You can adjust it in
30980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30981 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30982 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30988 \begin_layout Standard
30989 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30990 can add below the selection.
30991 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30992 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30998 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31012 \begin_layout Standard
31014 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31016 These are explained in detail in section
31018 Customizing Bibliographies
31022 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31027 Additional Features
31032 \begin_layout Subsection
31034 \begin_inset Index idx
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 Bibliography ! Citation format
31044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31046 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31053 \begin_layout Standard
31054 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31059 \begin_inset space \space{}
31062 numerical citation (as
31063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31070 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31078 ) or author-year citations (as
31079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31088 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31092 \begin_layout Standard
31093 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31101 \begin_inset Index idx
31104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31105 Document ! Settings
31110 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31116 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31117 labels, is there to use
31120 \begin_inset space ~
31131 \begin_inset space ~
31136 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31139 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31146 \begin_layout Standard
31147 With a bibliography database (see
31148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31150 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31157 ) one has in contrary to the
31161 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31162 These style formats are available:
31165 \begin_layout Description
31167 \begin_inset space ~
31170 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31171 -based approached without any additional packages
31172 (simple numeric citations).
31175 \begin_layout Description
31176 Biblatex loads the package
31181 \begin_inset Index idx
31184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 packages ! biblatex
31191 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31193 Biblatex citation style
31197 Biblatex bibliography style
31200 Options to the package
31204 can be entered in the
31211 \begin_layout Description
31213 \begin_inset space ~
31217 \begin_inset space ~
31220 mode) loads the package
31224 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31225 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31237 behavior very closely.
31242 this option has some additional styles.
31247 styles are also supported by this variant.
31250 \begin_layout Description
31252 \begin_inset space ~
31255 (BibTeX) loads the package
31260 \begin_inset Index idx
31263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31270 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31273 \begin_layout Description
31275 \begin_inset space ~
31278 (BibTeX) loads the package
31283 \begin_inset Index idx
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31293 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31296 \begin_layout Standard
31305 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31307 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31316 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31318 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31319 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31321 Biblatex citation style
31324 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31330 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31336 are available in the
31341 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31342 a name prefix such as
31343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31358 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31363 \begin_inset space \space{}
31367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31379 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31385 \begin_inset space \space{}
31388 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31394 \begin_inset space \space{}
31398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31410 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31414 \begin_inset space ~
31422 \begin_inset space ~
31428 Here is a simple example where the text
31429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31433 \begin_inset space ~
31437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31440 appears after the reference:
31443 \begin_layout Quote
31445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31448 key "latexcompanion"
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31457 All styles except for
31461 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31471 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31475 \begin_layout Standard
31476 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31477 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31478 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31483 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31484 multi-citation (so-called
31485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31488 qualified citation lists
31489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31495 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31500 dialog will display three columns in the field
31507 \begin_inset space ~
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_inset space ~
31529 If you double-click on an item's
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31540 \begin_inset space ~
31545 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31548 General text before
31554 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31557 \begin_layout Section
31559 \begin_inset Index idx
31562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31578 \begin_layout Standard
31579 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31583 \begin_inset space ~
31588 or the toolbar button
31595 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31596 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31597 by \SpecialChar LyX
31598 as the index entry.
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31602 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31605 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31607 \begin_inset space ~
31613 A light blue box labeled
31614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31625 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31626 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31630 \begin_layout Standard
31631 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31632 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31633 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31634 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31638 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31646 \begin_layout Subsection
31647 Grouping Index Entries
31648 \begin_inset Index idx
31651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31660 \begin_layout Standard
31661 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31663 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31664 lists under the entry
31665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31673 First we create the entry
31674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31688 reference "subsec:Lists"
31693 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31694 \begin_inset space ~
31698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31700 reference "sec:Itemize"
31704 , we insert the command
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31713 \begin_layout Standard
31717 \begin_layout Standard
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31724 for the enumerated list in section
31725 \begin_inset space ~
31729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31731 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31738 \begin_layout Standard
31739 The exclamation mark
31740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31747 marks the grouping levels.
31748 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31749 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31750 If we don't have an index entry for
31751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31758 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31761 \begin_layout Subsection
31763 \begin_inset Index idx
31766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31767 Index ! Page ranges
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31778 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31779 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31780 an index entry in section
31781 \begin_inset space ~
31785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31787 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31797 Paragraph environments|(
31800 \begin_layout Standard
31801 and another entry at the end of section
31802 \begin_inset space ~
31806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31808 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31815 \begin_layout Standard
31818 Paragraph environments|)
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31846 respectively start and end the index range.
31847 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31848 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31849 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31850 An example is the index entry
31851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31854 Document ! Settings
31855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31861 \begin_layout Subsection
31863 \begin_inset Index idx
31866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31867 Index ! Cross referencing
31875 \begin_layout Standard
31876 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31877 We referred for example in the index entry
31878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31886 \begin_inset space ~
31890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31892 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31896 ) to the index entry
31897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31904 in the same section using the entry
31907 \begin_layout Standard
31910 GIF|see{Image formats}
31913 \begin_layout Standard
31914 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31916 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31917 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31920 \begin_layout Subsection
31922 \begin_inset Index idx
31925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31926 Index ! Entry order
31934 \begin_layout Standard
31935 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31936 follow the rules for the index order.
31937 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31951 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31960 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31961 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31986 \begin_inset Index idx
31989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31990 Dummy entries ! maïs
31996 \begin_inset Index idx
31999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32000 Dummy entries ! maître
32006 \begin_inset Index idx
32009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32010 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32015 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32016 maïs, maison, maître.
32017 To achieve this, we use the command
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32023 previous entry@current entry
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32027 In our case we want to have
32028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32043 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32046 \begin_layout Standard
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32053 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32054 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32056 See the next subsection for an example.
32059 \begin_layout Subsection
32061 \begin_inset Index idx
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 Index ! Entry layout
32073 \begin_layout Standard
32074 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32075 \begin_inset Index idx
32078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32081 This is an italic dummy entry
32086 You can also format the page number using the character
32087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32094 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32095 -command without a backslash.
32096 We can write for example
32099 \begin_layout Standard
32102 italic page number:|textit
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32106 to get the page number in italic.
32107 \begin_inset Index idx
32110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32111 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32116 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32117 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32135 \begin_inset space ~
32141 Have a look at section
32142 \begin_inset space ~
32146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32148 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32152 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32156 \begin_layout Standard
32157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32165 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32169 to generate the index, see section
32170 \begin_inset space ~
32174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32176 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32185 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32190 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32194 key "latexcompanion"
32207 \begin_layout Standard
32208 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32210 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32211 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32212 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32213 If so, put the following in the preamble
32216 \begin_layout Standard
32228 \begin_layout Standard
32232 \begin_layout Standard
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 in the index entry.
32240 \begin_inset Index idx
32243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32244 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32249 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32250 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32251 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32256 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32257 a bold font for all index entries.
32258 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32270 documentation for details,
32271 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32273 key "makeindex,xindy"
32281 \begin_layout Subsection
32283 \begin_inset Index idx
32286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32295 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32302 \begin_layout Standard
32303 If the index generation program
32307 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32308 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32312 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32313 distribution, is used.
32317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32322 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32323 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32324 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32325 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32326 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32336 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32338 dialog, see section
32339 \begin_inset space ~
32343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32345 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32350 The available options are listed and explained in
32351 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32353 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32359 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32364 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32365 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32368 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32369 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32373 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32374 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32377 \begin_layout Subsection
32381 \begin_layout Standard
32382 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32383 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32391 next to the standard index.
32393 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32394 that add this feature.
32401 \begin_inset Index idx
32404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32406 packages ! splitidx
32411 package to generate multiple indexes.
32412 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32418 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32420 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32428 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32429 style, but it also includes
32430 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32431 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32439 \begin_layout Standard
32440 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32441 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32447 and select the option
32449 Use multiple Indexes
32456 already contains the standard index
32457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32465 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32466 also appear as a heading) to the
32470 input field and press the
32475 The new index now also appears in the list.
32476 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32477 label color to the new index.
32480 \begin_layout Standard
32481 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32485 List/Contents/References
32491 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32492 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32493 are additional features:
32496 \begin_layout Itemize
32497 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32498 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32501 \begin_layout Itemize
32502 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32503 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32508 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32509 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32510 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32511 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32514 \begin_layout Itemize
32519 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32520 code in the name of the index.
32523 \begin_layout Section
32524 Nomenclature/Glossary
32525 \begin_inset Index idx
32528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32535 \begin_inset Index idx
32538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32569 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32578 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32579 called nomenclature or glossary.
32582 \begin_layout Standard
32583 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32590 \begin_inset Index idx
32593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32601 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32610 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32614 \begin_layout Standard
32615 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32616 and then use the menu
32618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32624 \begin_inset space ~
32629 or the toolbar button
32632 arg "nomencl-insert"
32637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32648 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32651 \begin_layout Standard
32652 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32653 The first is the term or
32657 that you wish to define.
32662 of the term or symbol.
32665 \begin_layout Standard
32666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32674 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32675 code for nomenclature entries the option
32679 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32687 \begin_layout Subsection
32688 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32689 \begin_inset Index idx
32692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32693 Nomenclature ! Layout
32701 \begin_layout Standard
32702 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32706 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32713 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32721 \begin_inset Newline newline
32729 \begin_inset Newline newline
32735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32742 character starts/ends the formula.
32743 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32744 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32756 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32766 \begin_layout Standard
32767 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32768 syntax is given in section
32769 \begin_inset space ~
32773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32775 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32782 \begin_layout Standard
32786 \begin_inset space ~
32791 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32793 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32798 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32805 in this document is:
32806 \begin_inset Newline newline
32811 dummy entry for the character
32816 \begin_inset Newline newline
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32838 font use the command
32867 \begin_layout Standard
32868 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32873 \begin_inset space \space{}
32877 \begin_inset Newline newline
32893 \begin_inset Newline newline
32896 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32897 This command will make the font of all symbols
32904 \begin_inset space ~
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 If the characters |
32914 \begin_inset space \space{}
32918 \begin_inset space \space{}
32922 \begin_inset space \space{}
32926 \begin_inset space \space{}
32930 \begin_inset space \space{}
32933 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32934 code they need to be escaped
32935 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32936 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32937 LatexCommand nomenclature
32938 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32939 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32947 \begin_layout Subsection
32948 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32949 \begin_inset Index idx
32952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32953 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32963 -code of the symbol
32965 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32967 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32970 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32971 LatexCommand nomenclature
32973 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32981 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32985 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32986 LatexCommand nomenclature
32989 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32995 They will be sorted by
32996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33022 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33025 will be sorted before the
33029 since the character
33030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33037 is considered in sorting.
33040 \begin_layout Standard
33041 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33044 \begin_inset space ~
33049 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33050 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33052 For the example given, you can insert
33056 in this field for the
33057 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33064 will be located before
33065 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33071 \begin_layout Standard
33072 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33077 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33087 \begin_layout Subsection
33088 Nomenclature Options
33089 \begin_inset Index idx
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33093 Nomenclature ! Options
33099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33101 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33108 \begin_layout Standard
33113 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33114 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33117 \begin_layout Description
33118 refeq Appends the phrase
33119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33134 to every nomenclature entry, where
33140 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33143 \begin_layout Description
33144 refpage Appends the phrase
33145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33160 to every nomenclature entry, where
33166 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33169 \begin_layout Description
33170 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33173 \begin_layout Standard
33174 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33175 class options list in the
33177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33181 In this document the options
33188 \begin_layout Standard
33189 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33195 \begin_layout Standard
33196 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33197 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33202 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33205 \begin_layout Description
33215 \begin_layout Description
33218 nomrefpage Like the
33225 \begin_layout Description
33228 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33237 \begin_layout Description
33241 \begin_inset space ~
33247 \begin_inset space ~
33252 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33264 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33265 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33269 \begin_layout Standard
33278 \begin_inset Newline newline
33284 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33300 unskip, see equation
33303 \begin_inset Newline newline
33310 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33311 \begin_inset Newline newline
33317 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33321 \begin_inset space ~
33338 \begin_layout Standard
33339 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33342 \begin_inset space ~
33347 in the document settings under
33350 \begin_inset space ~
33358 \begin_layout Standard
33366 \begin_inset Newline newline
33370 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 \begin_inset space ~
33386 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33388 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33389 \begin_inset Newline newline
33396 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33397 \begin_inset Newline newline
33401 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33405 \begin_inset space ~
33417 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33422 \begin_layout Subsection
33423 Printing the Nomenclature
33424 \begin_inset Index idx
33427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 Nomenclature ! Printing
33436 \begin_layout Standard
33437 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33440 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33456 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33457 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33458 You can choose between these settings:
33461 \begin_layout Description
33462 Default a space of 1
33463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33469 \begin_layout Description
33471 \begin_inset space ~
33475 \begin_inset space ~
33478 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33481 \begin_layout Description
33482 Custom custom space
33485 \begin_layout Standard
33486 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33495 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33503 For example, in order to change the name to
33507 , add the following line to the preamble:
33510 \begin_layout Standard
33523 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33527 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33528 \begin_inset Newline newline
33543 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33546 \begin_layout Subsection
33547 Nomenclature Program
33548 \begin_inset Index idx
33551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33552 Nomenclature ! Program
33558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33560 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33573 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33574 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33576 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33581 by adding options, see section
33582 \begin_inset space ~
33586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33588 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33593 The available options are listed and explained in
33594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33596 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33604 \begin_layout Section
33606 \begin_inset Index idx
33609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33616 \begin_inset Index idx
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33620 Document ! Branches
33626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33628 name "sec:Branches"
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33637 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33638 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33639 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33642 \begin_layout Standard
33643 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33644 allows you to put text into branches.
33645 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33646 To create a branch, either select the menu
33648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33649 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33652 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33661 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33662 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33663 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33664 and whether the name of the branch should
33665 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33666 (see below for an example).
33667 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33668 to the name of the other) and to add
33669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33681 \begin_inset space ~
33684 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33685 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33689 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33690 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33695 where you can choose a branch.
33696 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33700 \begin_layout Standard
33701 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33702 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33705 \begin_layout Standard
33706 \begin_inset Branch Question
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33715 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33723 \begin_layout Standard
33724 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33733 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33741 \begin_layout Standard
33748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33749 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33752 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33753 Consider for example a file
33754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33761 which has the above branches.
33763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33770 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33794 branch were inactive,
33795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33810 branch was active, likewise
33811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33826 branch was active, and
33827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33830 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33834 if both branches were active.
33835 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33836 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33843 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33849 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33850 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33863 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33880 branch is deactivated.
33886 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33892 \begin_layout Standard
33893 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33894 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33895 definitions for each branch.
33896 For example you can define for the question branch
33900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33901 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33902 -syntax, see section
33903 \begin_inset space ~
33907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33909 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33921 \begin_layout Standard
33931 \begin_layout Standard
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 and for the answer branch
33945 \begin_layout Standard
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33965 \begin_layout Standard
33966 \begin_inset Branch Question
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34002 \begin_layout Standard
34003 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34039 \begin_layout Standard
34040 Now it is possible to use the
34044 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34051 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34054 commands to obtain conditional output.
34055 Here is an example formula where only the
34062 \begin_inset Formula
34064 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34072 \begin_layout Standard
34073 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34081 \begin_layout Standard
34082 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34088 \begin_inset space \space{}
34091 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34093 For this advanced usage, see the
34099 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34104 \begin_layout Section
34106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34108 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34113 \begin_inset Index idx
34116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 \begin_layout Standard
34128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34132 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34134 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34140 \begin_inset Index idx
34143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34145 packages ! hyperref
34150 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34151 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34152 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34153 part of the document.
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34158 The header information in the dialog tab
34162 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34163 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34164 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34165 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34169 \begin_inset space ~
34173 \begin_inset space ~
34178 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34179 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34180 and author entries.
34184 \begin_inset space ~
34188 \begin_inset space ~
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34197 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34200 \begin_layout Standard
34201 You can specify in the dialog tab
34205 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34210 \begin_inset space ~
34214 \begin_inset space ~
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34223 option allows long links to be split;
34226 \begin_inset space ~
34230 \begin_inset space ~
34234 \begin_inset space ~
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34247 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34250 \begin_inset space ~
34255 colors the different links.
34256 The default colors are:
34259 \begin_layout Labeling
34260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34265 for hyperlinks and URLs
34268 \begin_layout Labeling
34269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34277 \begin_layout Labeling
34278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 but you can change these in the field
34292 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34298 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34306 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34307 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34308 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34316 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34317 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34318 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34328 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34329 when opening the PDF.
34331 \begin_inset space ~
34334 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34335 \begin_inset space ~
34338 1 will only display the sections.
34341 \begin_layout Standard
34342 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34343 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34349 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34360 \begin_layout Section
34362 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34366 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34373 \begin_layout Subsection
34376 \begin_inset Index idx
34379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34389 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 As \SpecialChar LyX
34398 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34399 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34400 commands and constructs,
34403 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34404 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34405 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34406 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34407 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34408 cannot support all packages and
34412 \begin_layout Standard
34413 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34414 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34415 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34419 Code box is created by the menu
34421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34423 \begin_inset space ~
34428 or by the toolbar button
34441 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34452 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34454 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34459 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34464 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34471 , you can write the command part
34477 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34478 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34482 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34483 Code box behind the word.
34484 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34485 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34489 \begin_layout Standard
34490 \begin_inset Graphics
34491 filename clipart/ERT.png
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34503 \begin_layout Standard
34504 This is a line with a
34508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34540 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34541 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34542 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34543 know that the command is finished.
34551 \begin_layout Subsection
34552 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34554 \begin_inset Argument 1
34557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34565 \begin_inset Index idx
34568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34578 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34586 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34587 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34588 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34589 uses in the background.
34590 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34591 is based on commands, you can
34592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34600 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34601 any time if you know the right commands.
34602 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34603 is the end of the day.
34604 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34605 all caption labels bold.
34606 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34608 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34612 \begin_layout Standard
34613 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34615 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34617 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34630 \begin_layout Standard
34631 As result you find that the package
34636 \begin_inset Index idx
34639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34647 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34652 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34656 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_layout Standard
34669 usepackage[options]{package name}
34672 \begin_layout Standard
34673 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34674 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34675 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34676 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34679 \begin_layout Standard
34680 In your case the package name is
34685 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34690 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34691 So you add the command
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34699 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34703 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34708 For more commands provided by the
34712 package, have a look at its documentation,
34713 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34729 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34731 For example if you use a
34735 class, you don't need the package
34739 , you can instead write
34742 \begin_layout Standard
34747 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34752 \begin_layout Standard
34753 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34754 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34755 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34762 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34765 \begin_layout Standard
34766 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34767 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34769 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34770 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34771 Code box as described in the previous
34775 \begin_layout Standard
34776 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34777 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34780 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34782 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34790 \begin_layout Standard
34791 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34811 \begin_inset Note Note
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34815 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34823 \begin_layout Left Header
34824 \begin_inset Argument 1
34827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34847 \begin_inset Note Note
34850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 defines the header line as described below
34859 \begin_layout Center Header
34860 \begin_inset Argument 1
34863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34872 \begin_layout Right Header
34873 \begin_inset Argument 1
34876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 \begin_layout Left Footer
34898 \begin_inset Argument 1
34901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34922 \begin_layout Center Footer
34923 \begin_inset Argument 1
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34938 \begin_inset Newline newline
34942 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34948 \begin_layout Right Footer
34949 \begin_inset Argument 1
34952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34974 \begin_layout Section
34975 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34978 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34983 \begin_inset Index idx
34986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34987 Document ! Header/Footer line
34993 \begin_inset Index idx
34996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35005 \begin_layout Standard
35006 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35033 As a second step add in the menu
35035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35036 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35045 Custom Header/Footerlines
35048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35052 This module offers the following 6
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35059 \begin_layout Description
35061 \begin_inset space ~
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35083 \begin_layout Description
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35108 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35109 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35114 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35122 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35126 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35129 \begin_layout Standard
35130 \begin_inset Float figure
35137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35140 \begin_inset Tabular
35141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35143 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35145 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35165 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35194 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35205 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35209 The normal text on the page goes here.
35210 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35212 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35213 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35218 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35227 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35238 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35256 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35285 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35308 name "fig:Page-layout"
35312 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35325 \begin_layout Standard
35326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35334 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35338 \begin_inset space ~
35343 is set to “Default”.
35344 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35353 \begin_layout Subsection
35357 \begin_layout Standard
35358 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35359 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35360 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35361 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35363 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35365 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35370 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35376 \begin_inset space ~
35384 \begin_layout Description
35387 thepage prints the current page number
35390 \begin_layout Description
35393 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35396 \begin_layout Description
35399 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35402 \begin_layout Description
35405 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35406 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35413 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35416 because it usually goes in a left header.
35419 \begin_layout Description
35422 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35423 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35425 It is normally used in the right header.
35428 \begin_layout Subsection
35429 Default header/footer
35432 \begin_layout Standard
35433 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35434 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35435 footer has the page number.
35436 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35437 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35438 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35441 \begin_inset space ~
35449 \begin_layout Subsection
35453 \begin_layout Standard
35454 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35455 Some pages are different.
35456 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35457 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35458 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35459 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35460 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35464 Header and footer decoration line
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 By default, you get a 0.4
35469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35472 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35473 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35485 in the following way:
35488 \begin_layout Standard
35495 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35499 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35512 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35522 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35523 \begin_inset space ~
35527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35538 Several header/footer lines
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35543 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35544 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35546 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35572 \begin_layout Standard
35579 headheight}{height}
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35587 is a size in standard units (e.
35588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35592 \begin_inset space \space{}
35600 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35601 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35602 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35603 logfile with the menu
35605 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35615 \begin_inset space ~
35620 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35625 \begin_inset Index idx
35628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35630 packages ! fancyhdr
35636 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35637 for your header/footer.
35640 \begin_layout Subsection
35644 \begin_layout Standard
35645 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35646 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35647 This example consists of the following definition:
35650 \begin_layout Description
35652 \begin_inset space ~
35661 , empty optional argument
35664 \begin_layout Description
35666 \begin_inset space ~
35669 Header empty, empty optional argument
35672 \begin_layout Description
35674 \begin_inset space ~
35683 in the optional argument
35686 \begin_layout Description
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35697 in the optional argument
35700 \begin_layout Description
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35719 \begin_inset Newline newline
35723 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35730 in the optional argument
35733 \begin_layout Description
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35744 , empty optional argument
35747 \begin_layout Description
35750 headrulewidth set to 2
35751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35757 \begin_layout Standard
35758 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35759 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35765 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35775 \begin_layout Standard
35776 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35790 pagestyle{headings}
35796 \begin_inset Note Note
35799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35800 switches back to page style with the default headings
35808 \begin_layout Section
35809 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35812 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35817 \begin_inset Index idx
35820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35827 \begin_inset Index idx
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 \begin_layout Standard
35841 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35842 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35843 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35846 \begin_layout Subsection
35850 \begin_layout Standard
35851 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35857 \begin_inset Index idx
35860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35862 packages ! preview-latex
35867 (on some systems named simply
35872 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35874 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35881 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35883 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35891 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35892 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35893 -package are automatically
35894 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35898 \begin_layout Subsection
35902 \begin_layout Standard
35903 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35904 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35906 activate the option
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35929 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35936 \begin_inset space ~
35949 \begin_inset space ~
35954 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35958 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_layout Standard
35980 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35981 and when you finish
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35994 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35995 generated by activating the option
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36004 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36012 \begin_layout Subsection
36013 Selected document parts
36016 \begin_layout Standard
36017 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36018 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36019 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36020 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36022 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36028 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36029 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36030 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36033 \begin_layout Standard
36034 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36041 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36053 is explained in section
36055 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36060 \begin_inset space ~
36070 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36071 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36072 the final rotated boxes,
36073 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36074 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36076 Here is the result:
36079 \begin_layout Standard
36080 \begin_inset Preview
36082 \begin_layout Standard
36087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36091 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36097 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36107 height_special "totalheight"
36112 backgroundcolor "none"
36115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36140 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36146 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36168 \begin_layout Standard
36169 Previewing works also for colors.
36170 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36189 is explained in section
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36209 \begin_layout Standard
36210 \begin_inset Preview
36212 \begin_layout Standard
36216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36240 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 \begin_layout Standard
36260 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36266 \begin_layout Standard
36267 If \SpecialChar LyX
36268 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36269 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36270 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36271 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36272 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36273 the \SpecialChar TeX
36275 If \SpecialChar LyX
36276 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36277 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36279 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36280 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36281 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36284 \begin_layout Subsection
36289 \begin_layout Standard
36290 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36291 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36294 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36301 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36303 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36305 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36306 's main window, then only this selection
36307 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36308 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36309 the source view window.
36314 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36315 ; but note that if you have
36316 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36318 not just the one which is open at the time.
36321 \begin_layout Section
36322 Advanced Find and Replace
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36325 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36330 \begin_inset Index idx
36333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36340 \begin_inset Index idx
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36352 \begin_layout Subsection
36356 \begin_layout Standard
36357 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36358 allows for searching of complex,
36359 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36361 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36362 The key-features are:
36365 \begin_layout Itemize
36366 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36367 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36368 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36372 \begin_layout Itemize
36373 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36374 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36375 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36376 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36379 \begin_layout Itemize
36380 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36381 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36382 outside of mathematics environments
36385 \begin_layout Itemize
36386 Search may be widened to a specific
36391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36398 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36399 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36406 \begin_layout Itemize
36407 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36408 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36416 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36419 \begin_layout Subsection
36423 \begin_layout Standard
36424 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36439 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36442 ) or the toolbar button
36445 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36451 Advanced Find and Replace
36456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36460 \begin_layout Standard
36466 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36475 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36478 arg "paragraph-break"
36482 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36483 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36487 arg "paragraph-break"
36490 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36494 searches backwards.
36497 \begin_layout Standard
36501 \begin_inset space ~
36506 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36520 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36524 Searching for mathematics
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36528 Mathematical formulas, such as
36529 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36532 or something more complex like
36533 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36536 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36541 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36542 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36543 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36544 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36554 \begin_layout Standard
36555 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36556 This is done by switching to the
36560 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36565 This way, entering in the
36572 \begin_layout Itemize
36573 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36574 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36577 \begin_layout Itemize
36578 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36579 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36582 \begin_layout Itemize
36583 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36584 of it only within section headings.
36585 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36586 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36590 \begin_layout Itemize
36591 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36592 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36599 \begin_layout Standard
36600 The entries made in the
36604 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36613 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36617 button or alternatively press
36620 arg "paragraph-break"
36627 while the cursor is in the
36630 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_layout Standard
36639 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36641 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36645 \begin_layout Itemize
36646 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36647 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36655 with its typewriter version
36656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36670 \begin_layout Itemize
36671 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36677 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36689 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36696 (you may want to enable the
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36712 options and disable the
36720 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36728 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36729 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36733 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36736 , or occurrences of
36737 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36741 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36747 \begin_layout Subsection
36751 \begin_layout Standard
36752 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36757 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36759 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36761 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36771 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36777 This is done with the context menu
36779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36780 Insert Regular Expression
36782 while the cursor is in the
36787 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36788 expression matching rules
36792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36793 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36803 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36804 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36810 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36811 same text in the document.
36812 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36813 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36816 \begin_layout Enumerate
36817 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36822 editor the fraction
36823 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36827 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36830 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36831 fractions with the given denominator.
36834 \begin_layout Enumerate
36835 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36847 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36852 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36853 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36854 Also, by inserting a
36855 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36858 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36859 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36863 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36864 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36865 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36868 , and referring back to them through
36869 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36873 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36877 For example, try searching with the regexp
36878 \begin_inset Newline newline
36881 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36884 \begin_inset Newline newline
36887 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36890 \begin_layout Standard
36891 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36894 \begin_layout Standard
36895 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36903 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36904 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36905 sub-expressions is absolute.
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36911 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36914 always refers to the first occurrence of
36915 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36918 in all entered regexps.
36926 \begin_layout Section
36928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36930 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36935 \begin_inset Index idx
36938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36947 \begin_layout Standard
36949 has a built-in spell checker.
36952 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36959 key or the toolbar button
36962 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36965 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36966 beginning of the currently selected text.
36967 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36968 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36969 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36970 scrolled so that it is visible.
36971 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36972 n, if any could be found.
36973 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36977 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36978 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36981 \begin_layout Standard
36982 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36989 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36990 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36992 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36993 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37004 arg "dialog-show character"
37007 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37009 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37013 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37014 can be downloaded from here:
37015 \begin_inset Newline newline
37019 \begin_inset Flex URL
37022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37024 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37030 \begin_inset Newline newline
37034 \begin_inset space ~
37037 files for each language.
37038 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37039 \begin_inset space ~
37042 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37043 's installation subfolder
37051 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37053 \begin_inset Newline newline
37056 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37057 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37058 but in most cases these are
37074 is the language code.
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37085 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37090 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37093 you can set the following things:
37096 \begin_layout Description
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37101 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37102 should use for spell checking.
37103 Depending on your platform,
37113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37114 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37115 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37133 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37136 \begin_layout Description
37138 \begin_inset space ~
37141 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37142 will always use the given language
37143 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37146 \begin_layout Description
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37151 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37157 \begin_inset space \space{}
37161 This should normally not be needed.
37164 \begin_layout Description
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37173 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37185 \begin_layout Description
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37190 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37191 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37192 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37193 appear in a context menu.
37194 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37198 \begin_layout Description
37200 \begin_inset space ~
37204 \begin_inset space ~
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37211 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37215 \begin_layout Section
37217 \begin_inset Index idx
37220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37229 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37236 \begin_layout Standard
37238 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37239 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37249 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37251 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37261 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37263 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37264 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37265 which are available for many languages.
37268 \begin_layout Standard
37269 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37270 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37274 \begin_layout Subsection
37275 Setting up the thesaurus
37278 \begin_layout Standard
37287 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37291 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37296 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37302 \begin_inset space ~
37310 For instance, the US English files are named:
37313 \begin_layout Itemize
37317 \begin_layout Itemize
37321 \begin_layout Standard
37330 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37331 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37334 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37335 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37336 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37338 \begin_inset space ~
37343 ) to the path where they are installed.
37347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37348 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37349 ies, typical locations are
37355 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37359 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37363 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37366 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37372 LibreOffice-<Version>
37379 On the Mac, the default location is
37381 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37382 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37383 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37384 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37385 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37386 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37394 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37395 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37396 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37400 \begin_layout Standard
37401 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37402 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37404 \begin_inset Newline newline
37408 \begin_inset Flex URL
37411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37423 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37426 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37427 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37429 \begin_inset space ~
37434 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37436 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37437 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37442 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37444 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37447 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37453 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37456 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37457 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37465 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37466 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37467 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37474 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37477 \begin_layout Subsection
37478 Using the thesaurus
37481 \begin_layout Standard
37482 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37484 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37487 or the toolbar button
37490 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37493 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37495 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37497 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37498 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37499 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37508 ), related terms (such as
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37520 ), compounds (such as
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37532 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37541 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37544 \begin_layout Standard
37545 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37546 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37552 the dictionary, such as the above
37556 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37561 \begin_inset space \space{}
37564 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37565 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37566 For example, looking up the word form
37570 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37575 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37580 \begin_inset space \space{}
37591 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37592 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37593 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37596 \begin_layout Section
37598 \begin_inset Index idx
37601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37608 \begin_inset Index idx
37611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37612 Document ! Change Tracking
37618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37620 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37627 \begin_layout Standard
37628 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37629 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37630 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37631 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37638 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_layout Standard
37649 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37663 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37664 You can change the color in
37666 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37667 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37678 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37684 \begin_inset Index idx
37687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37688 Color ! Change tracking
37693 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37694 's status bar when the
37695 cursor is in changed text.
37696 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37699 arg "changes-merge"
37705 \begin_layout Standard
37706 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37708 \begin_inset Index idx
37711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37720 \begin_layout Standard
37721 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37728 \begin_inset Graphics
37729 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37738 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37744 \begin_layout Standard
37745 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37748 \begin_layout Standard
37749 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 \begin_inset Tabular
37757 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37758 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37759 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37760 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37770 arg "changes-track"
37778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37789 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37809 arg "changes-output"
37817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37828 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37868 Jumps to the next change
37874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37883 arg "change-accept"
37891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37899 \begin_inset space ~
37902 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37904 \begin_inset space ~
37913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37922 arg "change-reject"
37930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37941 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37943 \begin_inset space ~
37952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37961 arg "changes-merge"
37969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37980 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37982 \begin_inset space ~
37991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38000 arg "all-changes-accept"
38008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38016 \begin_inset space ~
38019 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset space ~
38034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38043 arg "all-changes-reject"
38051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38059 \begin_inset space ~
38062 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38101 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38135 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38137 \begin_inset space ~
38153 \begin_layout Standard
38154 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38161 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38183 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38184 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38185 the next change after the current cursor position.
38186 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38187 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38188 step to the next change.
38189 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38192 \begin_layout Standard
38193 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38194 to describe a change.
38197 \begin_layout Standard
38198 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38204 \begin_inset Index idx
38207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38217 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38224 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38228 \begin_layout Section
38229 Comparison of Documents
38230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38232 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38237 \begin_inset Index idx
38240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38241 Comparison of documents
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38253 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38257 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38258 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38260 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38262 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38266 \begin_inset space ~
38270 \begin_inset space ~
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38283 \begin_inset space ~
38287 \begin_inset space ~
38291 \begin_inset space ~
38295 \begin_inset space ~
38299 \begin_inset space ~
38303 \begin_inset space ~
38308 enables the change tracking option
38311 \begin_inset space ~
38315 \begin_inset space ~
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38324 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38327 \begin_layout Section
38328 International Support
38329 \begin_inset Index idx
38332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38333 International support
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38342 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38343 with any language you want.
38344 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38345 up \SpecialChar LyX
38347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38349 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38357 \begin_layout Standard
38358 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38359 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38366 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38373 \begin_layout Subsection
38375 \begin_inset Index idx
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38385 \begin_inset Index idx
38388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 Document ! Settings
38395 \begin_inset Index idx
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38399 Document ! Language
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38411 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38414 dialog lets you set
38416 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38421 \begin_layout Standard
38426 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38431 \begin_inset space ~
38436 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38437 For details about the different encoding options see section
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38444 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38451 \begin_layout Subsection
38452 Keyboard mapping configuration
38453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38455 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38462 \begin_layout Standard
38463 If you have for example a U.
38464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38467 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38468 can use an alternate keymap.
38469 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38475 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38476 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38479 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38480 \begin_inset space ~
38484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38486 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38491 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38492 which one you want to use.
38495 \begin_layout Standard
38496 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38497 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38498 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38502 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38503 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38504 one to support the characters you want.
38505 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38512 \begin_layout Chapter
38515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38517 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38524 \begin_layout Standard
38525 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38526 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38527 topic inside the user's guide.
38530 \begin_layout Section
38532 \begin_inset Index idx
38535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38544 \begin_layout Standard
38549 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38552 \begin_layout Subsection
38556 \begin_layout Standard
38557 Creates a new document.
38560 \begin_layout Subsection
38564 \begin_layout Standard
38565 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38566 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38567 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38569 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38570 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38576 \begin_layout Subsection
38580 \begin_layout Standard
38584 \begin_layout Subsection
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38589 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38590 Click there on a file to open it.
38593 \begin_layout Subsection
38595 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38599 \begin_layout Standard
38601 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38602 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38606 \begin_layout Subsection
38610 \begin_layout Standard
38611 Closes the current document.
38614 \begin_layout Subsection
38618 \begin_layout Standard
38619 Closes all opened documents.
38622 \begin_layout Subsection
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38627 Saves the actual document.
38630 \begin_layout Subsection
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38635 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38636 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38640 \begin_layout Subsection
38642 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38646 \begin_layout Standard
38648 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38649 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38655 \begin_layout Subsection
38659 \begin_layout Standard
38660 Saves all opened documents.
38663 \begin_layout Subsection
38667 \begin_layout Standard
38668 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38671 \begin_layout Subsection
38675 \begin_layout Standard
38676 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38677 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38678 It is described in the section
38680 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38685 Additional Features
38690 \begin_layout Subsection
38694 \begin_layout Standard
38695 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38696 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38698 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38699 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38703 \begin_layout Standard
38704 When using the menu entry
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38712 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38729 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38730 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38733 \begin_layout Subsection
38735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38737 name "subsec:Export"
38744 \begin_layout Standard
38745 You can export your document to various file formats.
38746 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38748 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38749 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38750 during its configuration.
38753 \begin_layout Standard
38754 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38762 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38769 \begin_layout Description
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38778 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38780 \begin_inset space ~
38783 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38784 \begin_inset Newline newline
38787 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38788 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38792 \begin_layout Description
38793 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38799 \begin_layout Description
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38804 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38810 \begin_layout Description
38811 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38812 's native DVI-format.
38813 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38814 files paths or file names in your document.
38816 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38823 \begin_layout Description
38824 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38825 in files paths or file names
38828 \begin_layout Description
38830 \begin_inset space ~
38837 ) DVI-format using the program
38839 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38842 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38862 \begin_layout Description
38864 \begin_inset space ~
38867 (cropped) the same as
38871 but with cropped page margins.
38874 \begin_layout Description
38876 \begin_inset space ~
38879 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38883 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38888 \begin_layout Description
38892 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38900 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38908 \begin_layout Description
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38917 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38921 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38929 \begin_layout Description
38933 \begin_inset space ~
38942 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38943 source that is compilable with the program
38945 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38949 \begin_layout Description
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38958 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38959 source, additionally all images used in the document
38960 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38964 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38967 \begin_layout Description
38971 \begin_inset space ~
38976 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38977 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38978 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38986 \begin_layout Description
38990 \begin_inset space ~
38999 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39000 source that is compilable with the program
39006 \begin_layout Description
39008 \begin_inset space ~
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39019 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39020 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39026 \begin_layout Description
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39031 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39032 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39038 \begin_inset space \space{}
39043 \begin_inset space ~
39047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39062 represent the version number)
39065 \begin_layout Description
39067 \begin_inset space ~
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39074 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39075 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39076 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39080 \begin_layout Description
39081 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39082 's internal XHTML engine
39085 \begin_layout Description
39087 \begin_inset space ~
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39102 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39107 For the conversion the program
39116 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39119 \begin_layout Description
39120 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39125 \begin_layout Description
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39130 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39132 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39135 For the conversion the program
39144 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39147 \begin_layout Description
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39152 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39153 For the conversion the program
39162 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39165 \begin_layout Description
39167 \begin_inset space ~
39170 (cropped) the same as
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39178 but with cropped page margins
39181 \begin_layout Description
39185 \begin_inset space ~
39190 PDF-format using the program
39194 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39197 \begin_layout Description
39201 \begin_inset space ~
39205 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39218 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39223 \begin_inset space \space{}
39226 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39230 \begin_layout Description
39234 \begin_inset space ~
39239 PDF-format using the program
39241 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39244 , produces PDF-files directly
39247 \begin_layout Description
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39256 PDF-format using the program
39260 , produces PDF-files directly
39263 \begin_layout Description
39267 \begin_inset space ~
39272 PDF-format using the program
39276 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39279 \begin_layout Description
39283 \begin_inset space ~
39288 PDF-format using the program
39293 , produces PDF-files directly
39296 \begin_layout Description
39300 \begin_inset space ~
39308 \begin_layout Description
39312 \begin_inset space ~
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39321 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39322 and then exported as text using the program
39327 \begin_layout Description
39332 PostScript format using the program
39340 options see section
39341 \begin_inset space ~
39345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39347 reference "subsec:General-output"
39354 \begin_layout Description
39355 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39356 source and also code in the statistical programming
39370 it is possible to use
39374 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39378 \begin_layout Standard
39379 If one of the menu entries
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39395 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39397 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39399 \begin_inset space ~
39403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39405 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39410 \begin_inset Index idx
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39414 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39423 \begin_layout Subsection
39427 \begin_layout Standard
39428 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39429 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39438 reference "sec:Paths"
39443 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39452 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39453 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39454 's preferences as described in section
39455 \begin_inset space ~
39459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39461 reference "subsec:Converters"
39468 \begin_layout Subsection
39469 New and Close Window
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39477 \begin_layout Subsection
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39485 \begin_layout Section
39487 \begin_inset Index idx
39490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39499 \begin_layout Subsection
39503 \begin_layout Standard
39504 Described in section
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39511 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39518 \begin_layout Subsection
39519 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39522 \begin_layout Standard
39523 Described in section
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39530 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39537 \begin_layout Subsection
39541 \begin_layout Standard
39542 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39543 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39546 \begin_layout Subsection
39550 \begin_layout Standard
39551 Selects the whole document.
39554 \begin_layout Subsection
39555 Find & Replace (Quick)
39558 \begin_layout Standard
39559 Described in section
39560 \begin_inset space ~
39564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39566 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39573 \begin_layout Subsection
39574 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39577 \begin_layout Standard
39578 Described in section
39579 \begin_inset space ~
39583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39585 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39592 \begin_layout Subsection
39593 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39596 \begin_layout Standard
39597 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39601 \begin_layout Subsection
39603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39610 Described in section
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39617 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39626 \begin_layout Subsection
39628 \begin_inset Index idx
39631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39632 Paragraph ! Settings
39640 \begin_layout Standard
39641 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39642 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39646 \begin_layout Standard
39647 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39648 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39655 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39657 \begin_inset space ~
39663 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39667 \begin_layout Subsection
39669 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39673 \begin_layout Standard
39675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39676 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39681 \begin_layout Enumerate
39683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39684 Customize text properties by means of the
39690 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39693 ; this is described in section
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39700 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39707 \begin_layout Enumerate
39709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39710 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39712 Apply last settings
39715 \begin_layout Enumerate
39717 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39718 Change the casing of selected text (
39733 \begin_layout Subsection
39735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39739 \begin_layout Standard
39741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39742 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39743 text styles (in the case of this document:
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39771 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39780 \begin_layout Subsection
39781 Table and Rows & Columns
39784 \begin_layout Standard
39785 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39786 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39787 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39790 \begin_layout Subsection
39794 \begin_layout Standard
39795 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39796 It will dissolve this inset.
39797 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39805 \begin_layout Standard
39806 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39807 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39810 \begin_layout Subsection
39811 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39814 \begin_layout Standard
39815 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39817 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39818 \begin_inset space ~
39822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39824 reference "sec:Nesting"
39829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39831 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39838 \begin_layout Section
39840 \begin_inset Index idx
39843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39852 \begin_layout Standard
39853 At the bottom of the
39857 menu the opened documents are listed.
39860 \begin_layout Subsection
39861 Open/Close all Insets
39864 \begin_layout Standard
39865 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39868 \begin_layout Subsection
39869 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39873 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39876 \begin_layout Standard
39877 Math macros are described in the
39884 \begin_layout Subsection
39888 \begin_layout Standard
39889 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39896 reference "sec:Navigating"
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39903 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39910 \begin_layout Subsection
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39923 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39930 \begin_layout Subsection
39934 \begin_layout Standard
39935 Opens a window showing console messages.
39936 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39941 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39942 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39943 is processing the document.
39946 \begin_layout Subsection
39948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39950 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39955 \begin_inset Index idx
39958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 \begin_layout Standard
39968 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39970 All toolbars and the
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39978 can be turned on and off.
39983 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39995 \begin_inset space ~
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40012 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40016 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40028 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40032 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40033 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40034 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40035 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40036 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40039 \begin_layout Standard
40041 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40048 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40055 \begin_layout Subsection
40059 \begin_layout Standard
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_inset space ~
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40088 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40089 's main window vertically while
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40104 \begin_inset space ~
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40117 will split it horizontally.
40118 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40119 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40120 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40121 three or more documents at the same time.
40122 To close a split view, use the menu
40125 \begin_inset space ~
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40137 \begin_layout Subsection
40141 \begin_layout Standard
40142 Closes a split view.
40145 \begin_layout Subsection
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40150 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40151 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40152 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40153 's main window fullscreen.
40154 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40155 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40158 \begin_layout Section
40160 \begin_inset Index idx
40163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 \begin_layout Subsection
40176 \begin_layout Standard
40177 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40178 \begin_inset space ~
40182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40184 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40195 \begin_layout Subsection
40197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40199 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40206 \begin_layout Standard
40207 Here you can insert the following characters:
40210 \begin_layout Description
40215 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40218 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40219 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40220 -packages you have installed.
40221 You can get a complete display by checking
40224 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset Newline newline
40234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40242 Not all characters will be visible in the
40246 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40247 dialog (see section
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40254 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40258 ) can display every character.
40266 \begin_layout Description
40267 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40271 \begin_layout Description
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40277 \begin_inset space ~
40280 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40287 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40294 \begin_layout Description
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40299 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40309 \begin_layout Description
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40314 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40318 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40324 \begin_layout Description
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40329 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40333 \begin_layout Description
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40338 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40342 \begin_layout Description
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40347 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40353 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40359 \begin_layout Description
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40364 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40368 \begin_layout Description
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40374 \begin_inset Index idx
40377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40384 \begin_inset Index idx
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40393 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40394 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40396 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40402 \begin_inset Index idx
40405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40413 \begin_inset Newline newline
40416 More information about this feature can be found in the
40422 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40428 \begin_layout Description
40429 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40431 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40432 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40436 \begin_layout Subsection
40440 \begin_layout Standard
40441 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40444 \begin_layout Description
40445 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40446 \begin_inset script superscript
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40457 \begin_layout Description
40458 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40459 \begin_inset script subscript
40461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40470 \begin_layout Description
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40475 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40482 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40489 \begin_layout Description
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40494 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40501 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40508 \begin_layout Description
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40513 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40520 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40527 \begin_layout Description
40529 \begin_inset space ~
40532 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40538 \begin_inset space \space{}
40541 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40542 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40551 To insert a fraction use the command
40556 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40560 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40569 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40576 \begin_layout Description
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40581 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40588 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40595 \begin_layout Description
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40600 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40601 \begin_inset space ~
40605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40607 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40614 \begin_layout Description
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40619 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40620 \begin_inset space ~
40624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40626 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40633 \begin_layout Description
40634 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40641 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40648 \begin_layout Description
40650 \begin_inset space ~
40653 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40660 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40667 \begin_layout Description
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40672 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40673 \begin_inset space ~
40677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40679 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40686 \begin_layout Description
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40692 \begin_inset space ~
40695 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40698 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40704 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40711 for a usage example.
40714 \begin_layout Description
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40723 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40730 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40737 \begin_layout Description
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40742 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40743 as described in section
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40750 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40757 \begin_layout Description
40759 \begin_inset space ~
40762 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40769 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40776 \begin_layout Description
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40781 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40782 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40790 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40797 \begin_layout Description
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40802 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40803 \begin_inset space ~
40807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40809 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40816 \begin_layout Description
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40822 \begin_inset space ~
40825 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40832 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40839 \begin_layout Subsection
40841 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40845 \begin_layout Standard
40847 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40848 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40849 The submenu allows you to insert
40852 \begin_layout Description
40854 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40859 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40862 \begin_layout Description
40864 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40866 \begin_inset space ~
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40873 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40877 \begin_layout Description
40879 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40884 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40887 \begin_layout Description
40889 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40894 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40897 \begin_layout Description
40899 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40901 \begin_inset space ~
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40908 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40919 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40922 \begin_layout Description
40924 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40937 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40940 \begin_layout Description
40942 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40949 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40950 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40963 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40966 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40972 \begin_layout Description
40974 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40975 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40976 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40977 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40980 \begin_layout Subsection
40983 List/Contents/References
40986 \begin_layout Standard
40987 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40991 \begin_inset space ~
41012 are described in section
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41019 reference "sec:toc"
41028 is described in section
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41035 reference "sec:Index"
41043 is described in section
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41050 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41056 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41059 is described in section
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41066 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41073 \begin_layout Subsection
41077 \begin_layout Standard
41078 To insert floats, as described in section
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41085 reference "sec:Floats"
41089 and in detail the chapter
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41104 \begin_layout Subsection
41108 \begin_layout Standard
41109 To insert notes, described in section
41110 \begin_inset space ~
41114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41116 reference "sec:Notes"
41123 \begin_layout Subsection
41127 \begin_layout Standard
41128 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41130 Branches are described in section
41131 \begin_inset space ~
41135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41137 reference "sec:Branches"
41144 \begin_layout Subsection
41148 \begin_layout Standard
41149 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41150 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41152 An example is the document class
41153 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41163 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41172 with three custom insets.
41175 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41179 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41185 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41188 \begin_layout Subsection
41190 \begin_inset Index idx
41193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41202 \begin_layout Standard
41203 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41205 For more information see chapter
41207 External Document Parts
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_layout Subsection
41218 \begin_inset Index idx
41221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 \begin_layout Standard
41231 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41232 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41247 \begin_layout Subsection
41251 \begin_layout Standard
41256 dialog as described in section
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41263 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41270 \begin_layout Subsection
41274 \begin_layout Standard
41279 as described in section
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41286 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41293 \begin_layout Subsection
41297 \begin_layout Standard
41302 as described in section
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41309 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41316 \begin_layout Subsection
41318 \begin_inset Index idx
41321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41328 \begin_inset Index idx
41331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41332 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41340 \begin_layout Standard
41341 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41342 Floats are described in section
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41349 reference "sec:Floats"
41353 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41355 Multi-page Captions
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41368 \begin_layout Subsection
41372 \begin_layout Standard
41373 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41380 reference "sec:Index"
41387 \begin_layout Subsection
41391 \begin_layout Standard
41392 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41399 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41406 \begin_layout Subsection
41410 \begin_layout Standard
41411 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41412 Tables are described in section
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41419 reference "sec:Tables"
41423 and in detail in the chapter
41430 \begin_inset space ~
41438 \begin_layout Subsection
41442 \begin_layout Standard
41448 Graphics are described in section
41449 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41455 reference "sec:Graphics"
41462 \begin_layout Subsection
41466 \begin_layout Standard
41467 Inserts a URL as described in section
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41474 reference "subsec:URLs"
41481 \begin_layout Subsection
41485 \begin_layout Standard
41486 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41493 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41500 \begin_layout Subsection
41504 \begin_layout Standard
41505 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41512 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41519 \begin_layout Subsection
41523 \begin_layout Standard
41524 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41525 \begin_inset space ~
41529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41531 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41538 \begin_layout Subsection
41541 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41544 \begin_layout Standard
41545 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41546 environments of the same type.
41548 \begin_inset space ~
41552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41554 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41558 for an explanation.
41561 \begin_layout Subsection
41565 \begin_layout Standard
41566 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41567 title or caption of a float.
41568 Inserts a short title as described in section
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41575 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41582 \begin_layout Subsection
41587 \begin_layout Standard
41588 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41589 Code box as described in section
41590 \begin_inset space ~
41594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41596 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41603 \begin_layout Subsection
41605 \begin_inset Index idx
41608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41617 \begin_layout Standard
41618 Inserts a program listings box.
41619 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41621 Program Code Listings
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41634 \begin_layout Subsection
41636 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41640 \begin_layout Standard
41642 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41643 Inserts the actual date.
41644 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41651 \begin_layout Subsection
41655 \begin_layout Standard
41656 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41657 \begin_inset space ~
41661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41663 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41670 \begin_layout Section
41672 \begin_inset Index idx
41675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41684 \begin_layout Standard
41685 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41689 of the current document.
41690 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41693 \begin_layout Subsection
41697 \begin_layout Standard
41698 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41699 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41700 to jump, for example, between section
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41705 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41709 2.5 and use the submenu
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41723 \begin_inset space ~
41729 \begin_inset space ~
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41739 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41743 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41749 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41752 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41755 \begin_layout Standard
41756 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41765 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41773 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41776 \begin_layout Subsection
41777 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41780 \begin_layout Standard
41781 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41785 \begin_layout Subsection
41789 \begin_layout Standard
41790 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41791 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41792 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41808 \begin_layout Subsection
41812 \begin_layout Standard
41813 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41816 The \SpecialChar LyX
41817 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41827 \begin_inset space ~
41832 manual for a detailed description.
41835 \begin_layout Section
41837 \begin_inset Index idx
41840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41849 \begin_layout Subsection
41853 \begin_layout Standard
41854 Change Tracking is described in section
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41861 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41868 \begin_layout Subsection
41876 \begin_layout Standard
41877 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41878 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41879 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41881 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41882 to the clipboard or update the view.
41883 \begin_inset Newline newline
41886 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41890 \begin_layout Standard
41893 Open Containing Directory
41895 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41896 's temporary folder for the document.
41897 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41898 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41899 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41900 For example some journals require to send the
41904 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41908 \begin_layout Subsection
41909 Start Appendix Here
41912 \begin_layout Standard
41913 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41914 as described in section
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41921 reference "sec:Appendices"
41928 \begin_layout Subsection
41930 \begin_inset space ~
41936 \begin_layout Standard
41937 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41938 default output format for the document (menu
41940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41941 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41942 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41960 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41964 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41967 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41968 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41973 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41978 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41980 \begin_inset space ~
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41996 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42000 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42001 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42003 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42004 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42009 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42014 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42018 \begin_inset space ~
42022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42024 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42029 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42030 when it is first configured.
42031 The default output format is
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_layout Subsection
42043 View (Other Formats)
42046 \begin_layout Standard
42047 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42048 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42049 actual document with an external program.
42050 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42051 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42052 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42054 All possible formats are listed in section
42055 \begin_inset space ~
42059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42061 reference "subsec:Export"
42066 You should at least see the menu entry
42071 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42073 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42075 \begin_inset space ~
42079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42081 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42086 \begin_inset Index idx
42089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42099 \begin_layout Standard
42100 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42101 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42103 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42104 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42106 \begin_inset space ~
42109 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42111 \begin_inset space ~
42114 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42118 \begin_inset space ~
42122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42124 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42129 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42130 when it is first configured.
42133 \begin_layout Subsection
42135 \begin_inset space ~
42141 \begin_layout Standard
42142 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42143 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42146 \begin_layout Subsection
42147 Update (Other Formats)
42150 \begin_layout Standard
42151 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42152 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42155 \begin_layout Subsection
42156 View Master Document
42159 \begin_layout Standard
42160 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42176 \begin_inset space ~
42181 manual for more information on this topic).
42182 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42183 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42191 \begin_inset space ~
42196 generates the output of the whole book, while
42200 will just output the chapter alone.
42203 \begin_layout Standard
42204 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42205 in the document settings (menu
42207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42209 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42227 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42231 ) or in the preferences (menu
42233 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42234 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42239 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42241 \begin_inset space ~
42244 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42246 \begin_inset space ~
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42262 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42269 \begin_layout Subsection
42270 Update Master Document
42273 \begin_layout Standard
42274 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42295 manual for more information on this topic).
42296 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42297 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42300 \begin_layout Standard
42301 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42302 in the document settings (menu
42304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42305 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42306 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42318 \begin_inset space ~
42322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42324 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42328 ) or in the preferences (menu
42330 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42331 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42333 \begin_inset space ~
42336 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42338 \begin_inset space ~
42341 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42359 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42366 \begin_layout Subsection
42368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42370 name "subsec:Compressed"
42377 \begin_layout Standard
42378 Un/compresses the current document.
42379 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42380 compression (see the
42382 Additional Features
42384 manual for details).
42387 \begin_layout Subsection
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42392 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42395 \begin_layout Subsection
42399 \begin_layout Standard
42400 The document settings are described in appendix
42401 \begin_inset space ~
42405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42407 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42414 \begin_layout Section
42416 \begin_inset Index idx
42419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42428 \begin_layout Subsection
42432 \begin_layout Standard
42433 Spell checking is explained in section
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42440 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42447 \begin_layout Subsection
42451 \begin_layout Standard
42452 The thesaurus is described in section
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42459 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42466 \begin_layout Subsection
42468 \begin_inset Index idx
42471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42478 \begin_inset Index idx
42481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42490 \begin_layout Standard
42491 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42492 the highlighted document part.
42495 \begin_layout Subsection
42501 \begin_inset Index idx
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42505 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42514 \begin_layout Standard
42515 Generates with the help of the program
42517 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42520 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42521 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42522 This feature is not available on Windows.
42525 \begin_layout Subsection
42531 \begin_inset Index idx
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42544 \begin_layout Standard
42545 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42550 \begin_inset space ~
42555 to see the full filename paths.
42558 \begin_layout Subsection
42560 \begin_inset Index idx
42563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 \begin_layout Standard
42573 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42574 files as described in section
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42581 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42588 \begin_layout Subsection
42590 \begin_inset Index idx
42593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42624 \begin_inset Index idx
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42628 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42637 \begin_layout Standard
42638 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42639 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42640 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42641 -packages and programs it needs; see
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42649 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42656 \begin_layout Subsection
42660 \begin_layout Standard
42665 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42666 \begin_inset space ~
42670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42672 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42679 \begin_layout Section
42681 \begin_inset Index idx
42684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42693 \begin_layout Standard
42694 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42695 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42697 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42701 \begin_layout Standard
42705 \begin_inset space ~
42710 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42711 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42712 packages and classes found
42713 by \SpecialChar LyX
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42721 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42728 \begin_layout Standard
42732 \begin_inset space ~
42737 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42742 \begin_layout Section
42744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42746 name "sec:Toolbars"
42753 \begin_layout Standard
42754 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42755 \begin_inset space ~
42759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42761 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42770 This is described in the
42772 Additional Features
42777 \begin_layout Subsection
42779 \begin_inset Index idx
42782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42792 \begin_inset Graphics
42793 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42802 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42808 \begin_layout Standard
42809 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42826 \begin_inset Note Note
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42835 manual for more information.
42843 \begin_layout Standard
42844 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42850 \begin_layout Standard
42851 \begin_inset Tabular
42852 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42853 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42861 \begin_inset Graphics
42862 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42876 pull-down box for the environments
42889 \begin_layout Standard
42890 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42898 \begin_inset Tabular
42899 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42900 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42901 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42902 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42926 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42956 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42986 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43002 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43032 arg "spelling-continuously"
43040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43044 Spellcheck continuously
43050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43073 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43103 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43133 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43163 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43193 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43195 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43200 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43218 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43232 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43258 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43300 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43314 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43315 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43343 Emphasize text, function of the
43344 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43347 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43349 \begin_inset space ~
43352 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43360 arg "dialog-show character"
43371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 Set text to noun style, function of the
43393 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43401 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43403 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43409 arg "dialog-show character"
43420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43426 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43429 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43442 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43445 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43458 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43463 arg "textstyle-apply"
43473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43478 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43479 Format text using the current settings in the
43481 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43486 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43521 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43541 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43569 arg "tabular-insert"
43577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43596 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43599 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43612 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43631 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43643 Toggle outline window on/off,
43645 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43661 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43673 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43700 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43713 \begin_layout Subsection
43715 \begin_inset Index idx
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43727 \begin_layout Standard
43728 \begin_inset Graphics
43729 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43737 \begin_layout Standard
43738 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43744 \begin_layout Standard
43745 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43749 \begin_layout Standard
43750 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43756 \begin_layout Standard
43757 \begin_inset Tabular
43758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43759 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43760 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43761 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43798 arg "layout Enumerate"
43806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43825 arg "layout Itemize"
43833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 arg "layout Description"
43887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43906 arg "depth-increment"
43914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43944 arg "depth-decrement"
43952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43960 \begin_inset space ~
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43982 arg "float-insert figure"
43990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43997 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 arg "float-insert table"
44021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44028 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44065 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44104 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44168 arg "nomencl-insert"
44176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44184 \begin_inset space ~
44193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44202 arg "footnote-insert"
44210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44232 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44281 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44301 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44395 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44410 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44426 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44441 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44443 \begin_inset space ~
44452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44461 arg "dialog-show character"
44469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44475 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44477 \begin_inset space ~
44480 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44498 arg "textstyle-apply"
44506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44512 Format text using the recent settings in the
44515 arg "dialog-show character"
44524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44533 arg "layout-paragraph"
44541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44547 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44567 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44581 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44595 \begin_layout Subsection
44596 View/Update Toolbar
44597 \begin_inset Index idx
44600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44601 Toolbar ! View / Update
44609 \begin_layout Standard
44610 \begin_inset Graphics
44611 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44625 \begin_layout Standard
44626 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44630 \begin_layout Standard
44631 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44637 \begin_layout Standard
44638 \begin_inset Tabular
44639 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44640 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44641 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44642 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44682 arg "buffer-update"
44690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44712 arg "master-buffer-view"
44720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44746 arg "master-buffer-update"
44754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44762 \begin_inset space ~
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44799 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44800 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44801 Synchronize with Output
44807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44835 View (Other Formats)
44841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44848 arg "update-others"
44852 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44867 Update (Other Formats)
44880 \begin_layout Standard
44882 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44883 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44889 \begin_layout Subsection
44893 \begin_layout Standard
44894 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44895 \begin_inset space ~
44899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44901 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44905 , the table toolbar
44906 \begin_inset Index idx
44909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44923 manual and the math macro toolbar
44924 \begin_inset Index idx
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44940 \begin_layout Chapter
44941 The Document Settings
44942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44944 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44949 \begin_inset Index idx
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44953 Document ! Settings
44961 \begin_layout Standard
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44970 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44971 is called with the menu
44973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44977 You can save your document settings as default with the
44979 Save as Document Defaults
44981 button in any dialog.
44982 This will create a template named
44986 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44987 when you create a new document without
44991 \begin_layout Standard
44996 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44997 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45000 \begin_layout Standard
45001 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45002 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45003 to find the one you are looking for.
45004 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45005 the submenus of the dialog.
45007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45011 \begin_inset space \space{}
45015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45022 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45023 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45024 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45027 \begin_layout Section
45031 \begin_layout Standard
45032 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45034 Document classes are described in section
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45041 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45049 \begin_layout Standard
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45058 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45063 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45064 as a layout for a document class.
45065 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45067 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45076 \begin_layout Standard
45077 Some classes use special class options by default.
45078 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45082 and you can decide to use them or not.
45083 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45084 recommended you leave them untouched.
45089 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45090 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45095 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45097 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45103 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45104 \begin_inset Newline newline
45109 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45112 \begin_inset Newline newline
45115 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45116 distribution, see section
45121 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45123 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45136 \begin_layout Standard
45141 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45142 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45143 in the background if the child document
45144 is opened without its master.
45145 This way child documents are always compilable.
45146 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_layout Standard
45162 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45173 \begin_inset Index idx
45176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45178 packages ! prettyref
45184 \begin_inset Index idx
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 packages ! refstyle
45194 for cross-references, see section
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45201 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45208 \begin_layout Section
45212 \begin_layout Standard
45213 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45214 Please refer to the section
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45230 manual for details.
45233 \begin_layout Section
45237 \begin_layout Standard
45238 Modules are explained in section
45239 \begin_inset space ~
45243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45245 reference "subsec:Modules"
45252 \begin_layout Section
45256 \begin_layout Standard
45258 \begin_inset space ~
45262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45264 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45271 \begin_layout Section
45275 \begin_layout Standard
45276 The document font settings are described in section
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45283 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45290 \begin_layout Section
45294 \begin_layout Standard
45295 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45312 and whether it should be a
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45320 can also be specified here.
45323 \begin_layout Standard
45324 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45325 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45326 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45328 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45331 \begin_layout Standard
45334 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45337 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45338 justifies the text on screen.
45339 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45341 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45345 \begin_layout Standard
45347 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45356 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45361 \begin_layout Section
45365 \begin_layout Standard
45366 This dialog is described in sections
45367 \begin_inset space ~
45371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45373 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45380 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45387 \begin_layout Section
45391 \begin_layout Standard
45392 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45393 \begin_inset space ~
45397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45399 reference "subsec:Margins"
45406 \begin_layout Section
45408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45410 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45415 \begin_inset Index idx
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 Language ! Encoding
45427 \begin_layout Standard
45428 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45429 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45430 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45432 is always encoded in utf8).
45433 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45434 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45435 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45436 -command is not known for
45437 a particular character).
45438 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45444 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45445 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45446 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45447 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45448 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45449 's default encoding).
45450 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45451 's Unicode support covers the
45452 characters of most scripts.
45453 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45454 using one of the traditional, or
45455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45462 , encodings is necessary.
45465 \begin_layout Standard
45467 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45469 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45472 Traditional (auto-selected)
45478 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45479 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45480 the given language(s).
45482 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45486 \begin_layout Standard
45488 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45489 If you use the option
45494 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45497 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45498 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45501 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45504 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45505 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45506 exactly one encoding.
45507 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45514 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45515 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45521 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45522 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45526 \begin_layout Standard
45528 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45529 Finally, you can also select
45533 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45534 Note that this encoding is then used for
45539 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45540 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45544 \begin_layout Standard
45546 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45549 Do not load inputenc
45551 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45552 from automatically loading the
45559 \begin_inset Index idx
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45564 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45566 packages ! inputenc
45572 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45573 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45574 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45575 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45576 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45578 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45584 Traditional (auto-selected)
45591 \begin_layout Standard
45593 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45595 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45596 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45597 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45598 installation supports Unicode), choose
45599 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45600 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45601 is quite incomplete, so
45602 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45607 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45608 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45609 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45610 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45611 -commands is not used, because all
45612 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45613 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45614 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45615 , two new alternative engines
45616 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45618 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45620 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45623 \begin_inset space ~
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45639 \begin_inset space ~
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45651 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45656 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45660 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45665 \begin_layout Standard
45669 \begin_inset space ~
45674 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45675 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45685 The possible settings are:
45688 \begin_layout Description
45689 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45691 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45692 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45696 \begin_inset space ~
45700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45702 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45709 \begin_layout Description
45710 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45711 format you will use.
45712 In many cases this will be
45717 \begin_inset Index idx
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45728 If the newer package
45733 \begin_inset Index idx
45736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45738 packages ! polyglossia
45743 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45744 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45745 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45747 this package will be used instead of
45754 \begin_layout Description
45756 \begin_inset space ~
45767 would be more appropriate.
45770 \begin_layout Description
45771 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45772 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45776 (for German texts), type in
45779 \begin_inset Newline newline
45784 usepackage{ngerman}
45787 \begin_layout Description
45788 None will not use a language package.
45789 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45796 \begin_layout Description
45798 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45800 \begin_inset space ~
45804 \begin_inset space ~
45808 \begin_inset space ~
45815 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45821 \begin_inset Index idx
45824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 packages ! inputenc
45832 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45833 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45834 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45840 \begin_layout Description
45841 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45843 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45844 commands, which may result in a big
45845 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45846 -commands are needed.
45848 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45849 This is the same as the
45862 \begin_layout Description
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45868 \begin_inset space ~
45871 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45874 \begin_layout Description
45876 \begin_inset space ~
45880 \begin_inset space ~
45883 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45886 \begin_layout Description
45888 \begin_inset space ~
45891 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45894 \begin_layout Description
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45903 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45904 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45907 \begin_layout Description
45909 \begin_inset space ~
45913 \begin_inset space ~
45916 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45920 \begin_layout Description
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset space ~
45929 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45930 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45933 \begin_layout Description
45935 \begin_inset space ~
45939 \begin_inset space ~
45943 \begin_inset space ~
45946 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45947 \begin_inset space ~
45953 \begin_layout Description
45955 \begin_inset space ~
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45963 \begin_inset space ~
45966 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45967 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45970 \begin_layout Description
45972 \begin_inset space ~
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45979 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45980 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45981 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45982 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45993 \begin_layout Description
45995 \begin_inset space ~
45999 \begin_inset space ~
46002 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46003 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46004 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46006 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46007 \begin_inset space ~
46011 \begin_inset space ~
46017 \begin_layout Description
46019 \begin_inset space ~
46023 \begin_inset space ~
46026 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46029 \begin_layout Description
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46038 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46041 \begin_layout Description
46043 \begin_inset space ~
46047 \begin_inset space ~
46050 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46053 \begin_layout Description
46055 \begin_inset space ~
46058 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46061 \begin_layout Description
46063 \begin_inset space ~
46066 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46069 \begin_layout Description
46071 \begin_inset space ~
46075 \begin_inset space ~
46078 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46081 \begin_layout Description
46083 \begin_inset space ~
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46093 \begin_layout Description
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46099 \begin_inset space ~
46102 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46105 \begin_layout Description
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46111 \begin_inset space ~
46117 \begin_layout Description
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46123 \begin_inset space ~
46126 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46132 \begin_inset Index idx
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46142 , when using this, set the document language to
46147 \begin_layout Description
46149 \begin_inset space ~
46153 \begin_inset space ~
46156 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46161 , when using this, set the document language to
46164 \begin_inset space ~
46170 \begin_layout Description
46172 \begin_inset space ~
46176 \begin_inset space ~
46179 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46185 \begin_inset Index idx
46188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46190 packages ! japanese
46195 , when using this, set the document language to
46200 \begin_layout Description
46202 \begin_inset space ~
46206 \begin_inset space ~
46209 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46214 , when using this, set the document language to
46219 \begin_layout Description
46221 \begin_inset space ~
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46228 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46233 , when using this, set the document language to
46238 \begin_layout Description
46240 \begin_inset space ~
46243 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46246 \begin_layout Description
46248 \begin_inset space ~
46252 \begin_inset space ~
46256 \begin_inset space ~
46259 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46262 \begin_layout Description
46264 \begin_inset space ~
46268 \begin_inset space ~
46272 \begin_inset space ~
46275 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46276 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46277 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46280 \begin_layout Description
46282 \begin_inset space ~
46286 \begin_inset space ~
46292 \begin_layout Description
46294 \begin_inset space ~
46298 \begin_inset space ~
46301 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46302 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46305 \begin_layout Description
46307 \begin_inset space ~
46311 \begin_inset space ~
46314 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46320 \begin_inset Index idx
46323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46330 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46331 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46333 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46334 with the default encoding (
46336 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46342 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46343 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46348 \begin_layout Description
46350 \begin_inset space ~
46358 \begin_inset space ~
46361 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46368 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46371 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46378 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46379 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46381 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46384 \begin_layout Description
46386 \begin_inset space ~
46390 \begin_inset space ~
46393 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46399 \begin_inset Index idx
46402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46413 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46415 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46416 This used to be more comprehensive than
46419 \begin_inset space ~
46424 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46429 \begin_layout Description
46431 \begin_inset space ~
46434 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46440 \begin_inset Index idx
46443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46445 packages ! inputenc
46452 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46453 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46455 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46456 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46457 with the default encoding (
46459 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46465 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46466 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46471 \begin_layout Description
46473 \begin_inset space ~
46477 \begin_inset space ~
46481 \begin_inset space ~
46484 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46485 \begin_inset space ~
46491 \begin_layout Description
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_inset space ~
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46504 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46505 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46506 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46510 \begin_layout Description
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46520 \begin_inset space ~
46523 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46524 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46527 \begin_layout Section
46529 \begin_inset Index idx
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46539 \begin_inset Index idx
46542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 \begin_inset Index idx
46552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 Color ! Shaded boxes
46559 \begin_inset Index idx
46562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46563 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46571 \begin_layout Standard
46572 Here you can alter the font color for the
46576 (default: black), for
46579 \begin_inset space ~
46584 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46588 (default: white) and for
46591 \begin_inset space ~
46601 sets the color back to the default.
46604 \begin_layout Standard
46605 Clicking any button showing
46613 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46614 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46615 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46616 later more quickly.
46619 \begin_layout Standard
46620 Note, if you change the
46623 \begin_inset space ~
46628 font color and use the option
46631 \begin_inset space ~
46636 in the document settings under
46639 \begin_inset space ~
46644 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46645 \begin_inset space ~
46649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46651 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46658 \begin_layout Standard
46659 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46665 \begin_layout Standard
46669 \begin_inset space ~
46678 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46681 \begin_inset space ~
46684 Code after a forced page break:
46687 \begin_layout Itemize
46688 For the page color:
46689 \begin_inset Newline newline
46696 pagecolor{color name}
46699 \begin_layout Itemize
46700 For the text color:
46701 \begin_inset Newline newline
46711 \begin_layout Standard
46712 You are restricted to one of
46748 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46755 \begin_inset space ~
46761 \begin_inset Newline newline
46764 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46765 names to refer to them:
46768 \begin_layout Itemize
46774 \begin_inset Newline newline
46779 page_backgroundcolor
46782 \begin_layout Itemize
46786 \begin_inset space ~
46792 \begin_inset Newline newline
46800 \begin_layout Itemize
46804 \begin_inset space ~
46810 \begin_inset Newline newline
46818 \begin_layout Itemize
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46828 \begin_inset Newline newline
46836 \begin_layout Standard
46837 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46840 \begin_inset space ~
46848 \begin_inset space ~
46856 \begin_layout Section
46860 \begin_layout Standard
46861 Here you can adjust the
46865 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46869 as described in section
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46876 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46881 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46885 \begin_layout Standard
46887 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46888 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46890 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46891 of this package can be used as well.
46892 The most common one are:
46895 \begin_layout Description
46897 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46898 right Line numbers to the right margin
46901 \begin_layout Description
46903 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46904 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46908 \begin_layout Description
46910 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46911 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46914 \begin_layout Description
46916 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46917 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46920 \begin_layout Description
46922 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46924 \begin_inset space ~
46927 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46932 \begin_layout Section
46936 \begin_layout Standard
46937 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46943 \begin_inset Index idx
46946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46948 packages ! biblatex
46958 \begin_inset Index idx
46961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 \begin_inset Index idx
46976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46984 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46987 Sectioned bibliography
46989 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46995 \begin_inset Index idx
46998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47000 packages ! bibtopic
47010 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47011 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47015 for the generation of the bibliography.
47016 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47017 \begin_inset space ~
47021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47023 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47030 \begin_layout Section
47034 \begin_layout Standard
47035 Here you can define the
47039 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47041 \begin_inset space ~
47045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47047 reference "sec:Index"
47054 \begin_layout Section
47058 \begin_layout Standard
47059 The PDF properties are explained in section
47060 \begin_inset space ~
47064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47066 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47073 \begin_layout Section
47077 \begin_layout Standard
47078 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47079 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47085 \begin_inset Index idx
47088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47100 \begin_inset Index idx
47103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47115 \begin_inset Index idx
47118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47130 \begin_inset Index idx
47133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47145 \begin_inset Index idx
47148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 packages ! mathdots
47160 \begin_inset Index idx
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47165 packages ! mathtools
47175 \begin_inset Index idx
47178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47190 \begin_inset Index idx
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 packages ! stackrel
47205 \begin_inset Index idx
47208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47210 packages ! stmaryrd
47220 \begin_inset Index idx
47223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47225 packages ! undertilde
47230 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47233 \begin_layout Description
47234 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47235 -errors in formulas,
47236 ensure that you have this enabled.
47239 \begin_layout Description
47240 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47241 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47242 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47246 \begin_layout Description
47247 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47250 \begin_inset space ~
47262 \begin_layout Description
47263 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47266 \begin_inset space ~
47278 \begin_layout Description
47279 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47290 \begin_layout Description
47291 mathtools is used for the math commands
47327 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47334 \begin_layout Description
47335 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47337 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47346 \begin_layout Description
47347 stackrel is used for the math command
47364 \begin_layout Description
47365 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47368 \begin_layout Description
47369 undertilde is used for the math command
47377 Accents for one Character
47386 \begin_layout Section
47388 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47390 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47396 \begin_layout Standard
47398 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47399 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47402 \begin_layout Standard
47404 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47405 The float placement options
47406 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47409 are described in the section
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47416 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47418 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47426 \begin_inset space ~
47434 \begin_layout Section
47438 \begin_layout Standard
47439 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47441 Program Code Listings
47446 \begin_inset space ~
47454 \begin_layout Section
47458 \begin_layout Standard
47459 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47467 set to be used and set the
47472 The itemize environment is described in section
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47479 reference "sec:Itemize"
47486 \begin_layout Standard
47487 You can furthermore specify a
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47495 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47496 command of the desired character.
47497 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47504 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47510 \begin_inset space \space{}
47514 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47524 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47525 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47528 \begin_layout Standard
47529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47537 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47538 -packages in the preamble (menu
47541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47545 \begin_inset space ~
47551 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47555 usepackage{textcomp}
47558 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47562 usepackage{amssymb}
47572 \begin_layout Section
47576 \begin_layout Standard
47577 Branches are described in section
47578 \begin_inset space ~
47582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47584 reference "sec:Branches"
47591 \begin_layout Section
47593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47595 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47602 \begin_layout Standard
47603 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47606 \begin_layout Description
47608 \begin_inset space ~
47612 \begin_inset space ~
47615 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47635 View Master Document
47636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47643 Update Master Document
47644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47651 menu or the toolbar.
47652 The default is set in
47654 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47655 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47657 \begin_inset space ~
47660 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47664 \begin_inset space ~
47668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47670 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47677 \begin_layout Description
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 Output settings for the menu
47688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47690 \begin_inset space ~
47696 For a detailed description see section
47698 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47711 \begin_layout Description
47713 \begin_inset space ~
47717 \begin_inset space ~
47720 Options offers settings for the export format
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47733 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47734 \begin_inset space ~
47737 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47746 settings are described in detail in section
47748 Math Output in XHTML
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47771 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47774 \begin_layout Description
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47781 Save transient properties
47783 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47784 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47785 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47789 \begin_layout Itemize
47790 the activation of change tracking
47793 \begin_layout Itemize
47794 the output of tracked changes
47797 \begin_layout Itemize
47798 the recording of the document directory path.
47801 \begin_layout Standard
47802 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47803 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47807 \begin_layout Section
47815 \begin_layout Standard
47816 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47818 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47820 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47822 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47826 \begin_layout Standard
47827 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47828 -syntax is given in section
47829 \begin_inset space ~
47833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47835 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47842 \begin_layout Chapter
47848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47850 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47855 \begin_inset Index idx
47858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47868 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47870 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47874 It has the following submenus.
47877 \begin_layout Section
47881 \begin_layout Subsection
47885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47886 User Interface File
47887 \begin_inset Index idx
47890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47891 Customization ! of toolbars
47897 \begin_inset Index idx
47900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47901 Customization ! of menus
47909 \begin_layout Standard
47910 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47911 interface (ui) file.
47912 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47920 \begin_layout Description
47925 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47928 \begin_layout Description
47935 the menu entries in popup context menus
47938 \begin_layout Description
47943 specifies the toolbar buttons
47946 \begin_layout Standard
47947 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47948 and edit the entries.
47951 \begin_layout Standard
47952 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47964 entries must be finished with an explicit
47989 and in the case of the
47990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48002 The syntax for the entries is:
48005 \begin_layout Standard
48006 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48035 \begin_layout Standard
48037 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48040 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48041 -functions are listed in the menu
48043 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48045 \begin_inset space ~
48053 \begin_layout Standard
48054 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48060 \begin_layout Standard
48061 For example, assuming you use the menu
48063 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48066 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48070 \begin_layout Standard
48071 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48095 \begin_layout Standard
48097 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48112 to have the sixth bookmark.
48115 \begin_layout Standard
48119 \begin_inset space ~
48124 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48125 's toolbar buttons.
48126 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48130 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48142 \begin_layout Standard
48145 Enable tool tips in main work area
48147 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48155 \begin_layout Standard
48160 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48161 should display in the menu
48163 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48165 \begin_inset space ~
48173 \begin_layout Subsection
48177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48181 \begin_layout Standard
48184 Restore window layouts and geometries
48187 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48188 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48192 \begin_layout Standard
48195 Restore cursor positions
48197 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48201 \begin_layout Standard
48204 Load opened files from last session
48206 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48210 \begin_layout Standard
48213 Clear all session information
48215 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48216 sessions (cursor positions, names
48217 of last opened documents, etc.).
48220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48224 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48229 \begin_inset Index idx
48232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48241 \begin_layout Standard
48244 Backup original documents when saving
48246 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48247 it was saved the last time.
48248 It is stored in the
48251 \begin_inset space ~
48257 \begin_inset space ~
48261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48263 reference "sec:Paths"
48267 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48270 \begin_inset space ~
48276 The backup file has the file extension
48277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48291 \begin_layout Standard
48294 Backup documents, every
48296 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48299 \begin_layout Standard
48302 Save documents compressed by default
48304 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48311 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48316 This applies to newly created documents only.
48317 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48321 Windows & work area
48324 \begin_layout Standard
48327 Open documents in tabs
48329 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48333 \begin_layout Standard
48338 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48345 \begin_inset space ~
48349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48351 reference "sec:Paths"
48355 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48362 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48363 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48364 of \SpecialChar LyX
48366 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48367 instance is created for each file.
48370 \begin_layout Standard
48373 Single close-tab button
48375 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48385 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48386 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48387 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48391 \begin_layout Standard
48392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48400 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48401 before the change takes effect.
48409 \begin_layout Standard
48414 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48416 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48418 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48422 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48423 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48424 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48427 \begin_layout Subsection
48429 \begin_inset Index idx
48432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48441 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48448 \begin_layout Standard
48449 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48453 \begin_layout Standard
48454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 This section only deals with the fonts
48466 the \SpecialChar LyX
48468 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48472 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48483 \begin_layout Standard
48484 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48501 (depends on the system) as its
48504 \begin_inset space ~
48520 \begin_layout Standard
48521 You can change the font size with the
48528 \begin_layout Standard
48533 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48538 points have the size of 1
48539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48543 \begin_inset space ~
48547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48549 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48554 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48559 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48560 \begin_inset space ~
48564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48566 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48573 \begin_layout Subsection
48575 \begin_inset Index idx
48578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48579 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48586 \begin_inset Index idx
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48598 \begin_layout Standard
48599 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48600 by choosing an item in the
48601 list and selecting the
48608 \begin_layout Standard
48609 By checking the option
48613 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48616 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48617 \begin_inset space ~
48621 \begin_inset space ~
48626 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48629 \begin_layout Subsection
48631 \begin_inset Index idx
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 \begin_layout Standard
48644 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48648 \begin_layout Standard
48653 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48654 This feature is described in section
48655 \begin_inset space ~
48659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48661 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48668 \begin_layout Standard
48669 Checking the option
48672 \begin_inset space ~
48676 \begin_inset space ~
48680 \begin_inset space ~
48685 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48688 \begin_layout Section
48690 \begin_inset Index idx
48693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 \begin_layout Subsection
48706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48710 \begin_layout Standard
48713 Cursor follows scrollbar
48715 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48719 \begin_layout Standard
48720 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48721 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48722 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48725 \begin_layout Standard
48728 Scroll below end of document
48730 is self-explanatory.
48733 \begin_layout Standard
48734 In \SpecialChar LyX
48735 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48742 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48744 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48745 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48748 \begin_layout Standard
48751 Sort environments alphabetically
48753 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48756 \begin_layout Standard
48759 Group environments by their category
48761 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48764 \begin_layout Standard
48769 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48784 \begin_layout Standard
48785 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48790 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48791 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48795 \begin_layout Subsection
48797 \begin_inset Index idx
48800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48807 \begin_inset Index idx
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48811 Settings ! Shortcuts
48819 \begin_layout Standard
48824 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48826 Several binding files are available, among them:
48829 \begin_layout Description
48830 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48833 \begin_layout Description
48834 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48846 \begin_layout Description
48847 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48858 \begin_layout Standard
48859 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48864 , and binding files for special languages.
48865 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48870 \begin_inset space \space{}
48874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48882 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48883 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48884 will try to use the appropriate binding
48888 \begin_layout Standard
48889 Some binding files, like
48893 , only have a limited scope.
48894 When looking at the end of the file
48898 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48901 \begin_layout Standard
48905 \begin_inset space ~
48909 \begin_inset space ~
48914 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48915 in the selected key binding file.
48918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48922 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48927 \begin_inset Index idx
48930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 Key Bindings ! Editing
48939 \begin_layout Standard
48940 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48941 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48942 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48943 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48946 Show key-bindings containing
48949 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48950 Insert there for example as keyword
48951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48958 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48959 functions that contain
48960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48968 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48969 All \SpecialChar LyX
48970 functions are also listed in the file
48975 that you will find in the
48982 \begin_layout Standard
48983 For example, to add the shortcut
48991 , select the function and press the
48996 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48997 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49000 \begin_layout Standard
49001 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49002 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49004 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49005 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49007 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49012 \begin_layout Standard
49013 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49016 \begin_layout Standard
49017 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49019 The syntax of the entries is:
49022 \begin_layout Standard
49028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49047 \begin_layout Standard
49048 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49049 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49077 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49078 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49079 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49080 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49082 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49086 , you needed to specify it as
49091 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49094 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49097 \begin_layout Subsection
49099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49101 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49106 \begin_inset Index idx
49109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49116 \begin_inset Index idx
49119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49120 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49128 \begin_layout Standard
49129 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49130 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49131 provides keyboard maps.
49132 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49133 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49136 \begin_inset space ~
49140 \begin_inset space ~
49145 and select the keyboard map file named
49152 \begin_layout Standard
49161 keyboard map and, if you use the
49165 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49168 arg "keymap-primary"
49174 arg "keymap-secondary"
49177 respectively or toggle between them with
49180 arg "keymap-toggle"
49186 \begin_layout Standard
49187 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49195 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49204 \begin_layout Standard
49205 You can also specify the mouse
49207 Wheel scrolling speed
49210 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49214 Middle mouse button pasting
49216 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49217 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49220 \begin_layout Standard
49228 \begin_inset space ~
49232 \begin_inset space ~
49237 you can select a key for zooming.
49238 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49241 \begin_layout Subsection
49245 \begin_layout Standard
49246 Input completion is described in section
49247 \begin_inset space ~
49251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49253 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49260 \begin_layout Section
49262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49269 \begin_inset Index idx
49272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49279 \begin_inset Index idx
49282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49291 \begin_layout Standard
49292 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49293 are normally determined during
49295 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49298 \begin_layout Description
49300 \begin_inset space ~
49303 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49304 's working directory.
49305 It is the default when you
49316 \begin_inset space ~
49324 \begin_layout Description
49326 \begin_inset space ~
49329 templates This directory
49330 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49331 contains the templates that are shown
49332 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49333 will be opened when you use the menu
49334 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49339 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49341 \begin_inset space ~
49345 \begin_inset space ~
49353 \begin_layout Description
49355 \begin_inset space ~
49358 files This directory
49359 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49360 will be opened when you use the
49361 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49362 contains the example files that are listed in
49365 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49374 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49376 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49378 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49384 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49386 \begin_inset Newline newline
49390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49403 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49413 \begin_layout Description
49415 \begin_inset space ~
49419 \begin_inset Index idx
49422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49428 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49429 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49430 \begin_inset space ~
49434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49436 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49444 will be used to save the backups.
49445 \begin_inset Newline newline
49448 Backup files have the ending
49449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49459 \begin_layout Description
49461 \begin_inset space ~
49464 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49465 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49467 \begin_inset Newline newline
49474 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49480 You can edit this file with the program
49489 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49490 in its preferences under
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49499 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49504 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49506 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49507 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49513 and \SpecialChar LyX
49514 need to be running the same time.
49515 \begin_inset Newline newline
49518 The pipe is also used for the
49522 feature, see section
49523 \begin_inset space ~
49527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49529 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49534 \begin_inset Newline newline
49537 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49538 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49539 \begin_inset Newline newline
49555 \begin_layout Description
49557 \begin_inset space ~
49560 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49563 \begin_layout Description
49565 \begin_inset space ~
49568 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49569 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49570 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49573 \begin_layout Description
49575 \begin_inset space ~
49578 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49584 You only need to specify it if you are using
49588 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49590 For \SpecialChar LyX
49595 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49599 \begin_layout Description
49601 \begin_inset space ~
49604 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49605 When \SpecialChar LyX
49606 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49607 to find it on the system.
49608 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49610 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49619 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49620 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49623 \begin_layout Description
49625 \begin_inset space ~
49628 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49629 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49630 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49631 code or in the document
49633 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49635 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49636 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49637 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49638 scanned for the input files.
49639 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49640 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49642 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49643 compilation may fail for some documents.
49646 \begin_layout Section
49650 \begin_layout Standard
49651 Here you can insert your
49660 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49662 \begin_inset space ~
49666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49668 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49672 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49675 \begin_layout Section
49677 \begin_inset Index idx
49680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49681 Language ! Settings
49687 \begin_inset Index idx
49690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49691 Settings ! Language
49699 \begin_layout Subsection
49701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49703 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49710 \begin_layout Description
49712 \begin_inset space ~
49716 \begin_inset space ~
49719 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49721 You can find its actual translation status here:
49722 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49724 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49732 \begin_layout Description
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49737 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49738 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49739 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49740 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49757 The most widespread language package is
49762 \begin_inset Index idx
49765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49772 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49774 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49775 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49776 come with the alternative
49782 \begin_inset Index idx
49785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49787 packages ! polyglossia
49792 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49793 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49799 The available selections are described in section
49800 \begin_inset space ~
49804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49806 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49813 \begin_layout Description
49815 \begin_inset space ~
49818 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49819 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49820 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49821 An example is the start command
49827 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49829 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49833 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49849 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49854 \begin_layout Description
49856 \begin_inset space ~
49864 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49865 command toggles the package on and off.
49868 \begin_layout Description
49870 \begin_inset space ~
49874 \begin_inset space ~
49877 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49881 \begin_layout Description
49883 \begin_inset space ~
49887 \begin_inset space ~
49890 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49894 \begin_layout Description
49896 \begin_inset space ~
49900 \begin_inset space ~
49903 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49904 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49905 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49907 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49914 \begin_layout Description
49916 \begin_inset space ~
49919 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49921 When this option is not set, the
49924 \begin_inset space ~
49929 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49931 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49934 \begin_inset space ~
49942 \begin_layout Description
49944 \begin_inset space ~
49950 \begin_inset space ~
49956 When it is not set, the
49959 \begin_inset space ~
49964 is set to the end of the document.
49967 \begin_layout Description
49969 \begin_inset space ~
49973 \begin_inset space ~
49976 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49977 language will be underlined in blue.
49980 \begin_layout Description
49982 \begin_inset space ~
49986 \begin_inset space ~
49989 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49990 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49993 \begin_layout Description
49995 \begin_inset space ~
49998 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49999 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50000 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
50001 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50004 \begin_layout Subsection
50008 \begin_layout Standard
50009 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50010 \begin_inset space ~
50014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50016 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50023 \begin_layout Section
50027 \begin_layout Subsection
50029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50031 name "subsec:General-output"
50038 \begin_layout Description
50040 \begin_inset space ~
50043 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50045 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50053 For a detailed description see section
50055 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50060 \begin_inset space ~
50068 \begin_layout Description
50070 \begin_inset space ~
50073 Options Options for the program
50077 that is used for the export format
50082 \begin_inset space ~
50086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50088 reference "subsec:Export"
50093 Possible options are listed in the
50098 \begin_inset Newline newline
50102 \begin_inset Flex URL
50105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50107 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50117 \begin_layout Description
50119 \begin_inset space ~
50123 \begin_inset space ~
50126 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50129 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50130 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50138 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50141 \begin_layout Description
50143 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50145 \begin_inset space ~
50149 \begin_inset Index idx
50152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50159 \begin_inset Index idx
50162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50163 Settings ! Date format
50168 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50169 \begin_inset Newline newline
50173 \begin_inset Flex URL
50176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50178 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50184 \begin_inset Newline newline
50187 For example the format
50188 \begin_inset Newline newline
50192 \begin_inset Newline newline
50195 prints the date as day/month/year.
50200 \begin_layout Description
50202 \begin_inset space ~
50206 \begin_inset space ~
50209 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50210 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50213 \begin_layout Subsection
50219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50221 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50226 \begin_inset Index idx
50229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50230 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50239 \begin_layout Description
50241 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50243 \begin_inset space ~
50251 \begin_inset space ~
50255 \begin_inset space ~
50258 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50263 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50284 are used for Cyrillic.
50285 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50298 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50300 sets up in the background.
50301 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50306 \begin_layout Description
50308 \begin_inset space ~
50312 \begin_inset space ~
50316 \begin_inset space ~
50320 \begin_inset space ~
50323 options They only have an effect when the program
50327 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50330 \begin_layout Standard
50331 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50332 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50333 manuals of the applications.
50336 \begin_layout Description
50338 \begin_inset space ~
50341 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50342 \begin_inset space ~
50346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50348 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50355 \begin_layout Description
50357 \begin_inset space ~
50360 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
50361 \begin_inset space ~
50365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50367 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50374 \begin_layout Description
50376 \begin_inset space ~
50379 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
50380 \begin_inset space ~
50384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50386 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50393 \begin_layout Description
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50402 command Command for the program
50404 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50407 that is described in the section
50409 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50414 Additional Features
50419 \begin_layout Standard
50420 There are additionally the following options:
50423 \begin_layout Description
50425 \begin_inset space ~
50429 \begin_inset space ~
50433 \begin_inset space ~
50437 \begin_inset space ~
50442 \begin_inset space ~
50445 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50463 to separate folders.
50464 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50466 \begin_inset Index idx
50469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50476 \begin_inset Index idx
50479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50488 \begin_layout Description
50490 \begin_inset space ~
50494 \begin_inset space ~
50498 \begin_inset space ~
50502 \begin_inset space ~
50506 \begin_inset space ~
50510 \begin_inset space ~
50513 changes Removes all manually set
50519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50520 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50522 \begin_inset space ~
50527 dialog when changing the document class.
50530 \begin_layout Section
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50536 \begin_inset Index idx
50539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50548 \begin_layout Subsection
50550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50552 name "subsec:Converters"
50557 \begin_inset Index idx
50560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50569 \begin_layout Standard
50570 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50571 from one format to another.
50572 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50573 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50580 \begin_inset space ~
50585 field and press the
50590 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50594 \begin_inset space ~
50599 drop-down list, modify the
50603 field and press the
50610 \begin_layout Standard
50613 Converter File Cache
50619 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50621 Maximum Age (in days
50624 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50625 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50628 \begin_layout Standard
50629 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50630 definition, is described in the section
50641 \begin_layout Subsection
50643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50645 name "sec:File-Formats"
50650 \begin_inset Index idx
50653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50660 \begin_inset Index idx
50663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50672 \begin_layout Standard
50673 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50683 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50686 \begin_layout Standard
50687 You can also define the
50689 Default output format
50691 that is used when you use
50693 View, Update, View Master Document
50697 Update Master Document
50703 menu or the toolbar.
50706 \begin_layout Standard
50707 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50718 \begin_layout Standard
50719 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50721 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50722 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50723 This is done by specifying a
50728 More about this is described in the section
50739 \begin_layout Chapter
50740 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50742 \begin_inset Index idx
50745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50754 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50761 \begin_layout Standard
50763 \begin_inset space ~
50767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50769 reference "tab:Units"
50773 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50774 and used in this documentation.
50777 \begin_layout Standard
50778 \begin_inset Float table
50785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50786 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50804 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50812 \begin_inset Tabular
50813 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50814 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50815 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50816 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50970 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51241 scaled point (65536
51242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51309 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51433 % of original image width
51438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51522 \begin_layout Standard
51523 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51526 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
51533 \begin_layout Bibliography
51534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51535 LatexCommand bibitem
51542 The \SpecialChar LyX
51544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51547 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51553 \begin_inset Newline newline
51557 \begin_inset Flex URL
51560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51562 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51570 \begin_layout Bibliography
51571 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51572 LatexCommand bibitem
51573 key "latexcompanion"
51578 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51580 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51581 Companion Second Edition.
51584 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51587 \begin_layout Bibliography
51588 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51589 LatexCommand bibitem
51595 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51598 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51602 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51605 \begin_layout Bibliography
51606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51607 LatexCommand bibitem
51616 : A Document Preparation System.
51619 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51622 \begin_layout Bibliography
51623 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51624 LatexCommand bibitem
51634 The \SpecialChar TeX
51638 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51641 \begin_layout Bibliography
51642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51643 LatexCommand bibitem
51649 The \SpecialChar TeX
51651 \begin_inset Newline newline
51655 \begin_inset Flex URL
51658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51660 https://ctan.org/topic
51668 \begin_layout Bibliography
51669 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51670 LatexCommand bibitem
51676 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51678 \begin_inset Newline newline
51682 \begin_inset Flex URL
51685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51687 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51695 \begin_layout Bibliography
51696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51697 LatexCommand bibitem
51704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51706 name "Documentation"
51707 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51714 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51718 \begin_inset Newline newline
51722 \begin_inset Flex URL
51725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51727 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51735 \begin_layout Bibliography
51736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51737 LatexCommand bibitem
51744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51746 name "Documentation"
51747 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51752 how to use the program
51754 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51758 \begin_inset Newline newline
51762 \begin_inset Flex URL
51765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51767 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51775 \begin_layout Bibliography
51776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51777 LatexCommand bibitem
51784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51786 name "Documentation"
51787 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51792 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51798 \begin_inset Index idx
51801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51803 packages ! biblatex
51809 \begin_inset Newline newline
51813 \begin_inset Flex URL
51816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51818 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51826 \begin_layout Bibliography
51827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51828 LatexCommand bibitem
51835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51837 name "Documentation"
51838 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51843 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51849 \begin_inset Index idx
51852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51860 \begin_inset Newline newline
51864 \begin_inset Flex URL
51867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51869 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51877 \begin_layout Bibliography
51878 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51879 LatexCommand bibitem
51886 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51888 name "Documentation"
51889 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51899 \begin_inset Newline newline
51903 \begin_inset Flex URL
51906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51908 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51916 \begin_layout Bibliography
51917 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51918 LatexCommand bibitem
51919 key "makeindex-man"
51925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51928 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51938 \begin_inset Newline newline
51942 \begin_inset Flex URL
51945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51947 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51955 \begin_layout Bibliography
51956 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51957 LatexCommand bibitem
51964 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51966 name "Documentation"
51967 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51977 \begin_inset Newline newline
51981 \begin_inset Flex URL
51984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51986 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51994 \begin_layout Bibliography
51995 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51996 LatexCommand bibitem
52003 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52005 name "Documentation"
52006 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52011 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52013 \begin_inset Newline newline
52017 \begin_inset Flex URL
52020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52022 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52030 \begin_layout Bibliography
52031 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52032 LatexCommand bibitem
52039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52041 name "Documentation"
52042 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52047 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52053 \begin_inset Index idx
52056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52064 \begin_inset Newline newline
52068 \begin_inset Flex URL
52071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52073 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52081 \begin_layout Bibliography
52082 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52083 LatexCommand bibitem
52090 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52092 name "Documentation"
52093 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52098 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52104 \begin_inset Index idx
52107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52109 packages ! enumitem
52115 \begin_inset Newline newline
52119 \begin_inset Flex URL
52122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52124 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52132 \begin_layout Bibliography
52133 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52134 LatexCommand bibitem
52141 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52143 name "Documentation"
52144 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52149 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52155 \begin_inset Index idx
52158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52160 packages ! fancyhdr
52166 \begin_inset Newline newline
52170 \begin_inset Flex URL
52173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52175 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52183 \begin_layout Bibliography
52184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52185 LatexCommand bibitem
52192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52194 name "Documentation"
52195 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52200 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52206 \begin_inset Index idx
52209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52211 packages ! hyperref
52217 \begin_inset Newline newline
52221 \begin_inset Flex URL
52224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52226 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52234 \begin_layout Bibliography
52235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52236 LatexCommand bibitem
52243 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52245 name "Documentation"
52246 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52251 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52257 \begin_inset Index idx
52260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52262 packages ! microtpye
52268 \begin_inset Newline newline
52272 \begin_inset Flex URL
52275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52277 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52285 \begin_layout Bibliography
52286 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52287 LatexCommand bibitem
52294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52296 name "Documentation"
52297 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52302 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52308 \begin_inset Index idx
52311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52319 \begin_inset Newline newline
52323 \begin_inset Flex URL
52326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52328 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52336 \begin_layout Bibliography
52337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52338 LatexCommand bibitem
52345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52347 name "Documentation"
52348 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52353 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52359 \begin_inset Index idx
52362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52364 packages ! prettyref
52370 \begin_inset Newline newline
52374 \begin_inset Flex URL
52377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52379 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52387 \begin_layout Bibliography
52388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52389 LatexCommand bibitem
52396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52398 name "Documentation"
52399 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52404 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52410 \begin_inset Index idx
52413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52415 packages ! refstyle
52421 \begin_inset Newline newline
52425 \begin_inset Flex URL
52428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52430 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52438 \begin_layout Bibliography
52439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52440 LatexCommand bibitem
52447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52450 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52455 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52457 \begin_inset Newline newline
52461 \begin_inset Flex URL
52464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52466 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52474 \begin_layout Bibliography
52475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52476 LatexCommand bibitem
52483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52486 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52491 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52493 \begin_inset Newline newline
52497 \begin_inset Flex URL
52500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52502 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52510 \begin_layout Bibliography
52511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52512 LatexCommand bibitem
52519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52522 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52527 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52528 for Cyrillic languages:
52529 \begin_inset Newline newline
52533 \begin_inset Flex URL
52536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52538 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52546 \begin_layout Bibliography
52547 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52548 LatexCommand bibitem
52555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52558 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52563 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52565 \begin_inset Newline newline
52569 \begin_inset Flex URL
52572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52574 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52582 \begin_layout Bibliography
52583 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52584 LatexCommand bibitem
52591 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52594 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52599 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52601 \begin_inset Newline newline
52605 \begin_inset Flex URL
52608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52610 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52618 \begin_layout Bibliography
52619 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52620 LatexCommand bibitem
52627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52630 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52635 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52637 \begin_inset Newline newline
52641 \begin_inset Flex URL
52644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52646 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52654 \begin_layout Standard
52655 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52689 \begin_inset Note Note
52692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52699 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52700 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52701 bibliography is the second one:
52709 \begin_layout Standard
52710 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52711 LatexCommand bibtex
52712 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52713 options "biblio/alphadin"
52720 \begin_layout Standard
52721 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52725 \begin_layout Standard
52729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52735 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52744 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52752 \begin_inset Note Note
52755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52756 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52757 \begin_inset space ~
52761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52763 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52775 \begin_layout Standard
52776 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52777 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52783 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52784 LatexCommand printindex